HOME 
 
 ARTS AND CRAFTS 
 
 EDITED AND COMPILED BY 
 
 MONTAGUE MARKS 
 
 WITH MANY ILLUSTRATIONS 
 
 HOW TO TEACH YOURSELF 
 
 MODELLING IN CLAY 
 MODELLING IN GESSO 
 WOOD CARVING 
 FRET SAWING 
 POKER WORK 
 PYROGRAVURE 
 LEATHER 
 
 DECORATION 
 
 SAW-PIERCING 
 ETCHING ON METAL 
 METAL HAMMERING 
 BENT-IRON WORK 
 APPLIED DESIGN 
 ORNAMENT 
 WALL-PAPER 
 
 DESIGNING 
 
 TEXTILE DESIGNING 
 TILE DESIGNING 
 DAMAGED CHINA 
 
 RESTORING 
 “ GRANGERISING” 
 TAXIDERMY 
 
 ETC., ETC. 
 
 London 
 
 C. Arthur Pearson Ltd. 
 
 Henrietta Street 
 1903 
 
CONTENTS 
 
 MODELLING. 
 
 PAGE 
 
 MODELLING IN CLAY: 
 
 I. Materials and Appliances . . . . . *7 
 
 II. Working from the Cast ...... 18-19 
 
 III. Working from Life:—T he full-length figure—The stand for a bust— 
 
 The draped figure—Proportions—The statuette . . . 19-22 
 
 MODELLING IN CHINA CLAY: 
 
 Useful for small figures made to be fired—Tinted clays—Modelling 
 in low relief 22-27 
 
 MODELLING IN WAX: 
 
 Modelling wax—“ Composite Clay,” a substitute . . . .27 
 
 MODELLING (PAINTING) IN GESSO: 
 
 A composition of whiting and size, resembling putty—Attaches itself 
 to any surface—Very pliant—Tinted and gilded gesso—Metallic 
 lacquers ..••••••• 
 
 PLASTER CASTS: 
 
 I. From the Clay Model ••••••* 28 
 
 II. From Life . . • • • • • • 31 
 
 III. Gelatine Moulds for Plaster Casts . . • • 31 
 
 WOOD-CARVING. 
 
 I Chip (Notch) Carving :—The most elementary form of wood-carving 
 
 —Woods—For a first attempt—Finishing—Polishing . . 3 2 - 3 5 
 
 II Tools and Appliances:—M ade-up “Sets for Amateurs” to be avoided 
 
 _Transfer paper—Carver’s bench — Tool chest—“Holdfast” and 
 
 “Bench Screw”—“Bench Bolts” .... 55 _3 ^ 
 
 III. Preliminary Practice—Care of Tools . • • 56-37 
 
 V 
 
VI 
 
 CONTENTS 
 
 IV. Surface Decoration Dragon ” or “Viking” style, perhaps, most PJGE 
 
 artistic kind of surface carving—Suitable for rulers, paper-knives, 
 tea-trays, etc. . . . . . _ > '37-38 
 
 V. Relief Carving Simple Exercises for Beginners — Finishing with 
 
 law linseed oil Polishing—Stamped Backgrounds—A Gothic dado 
 
 rail The cardboard “ Mould ”—Decoration of edges of shelves_ 
 
 Diaper designs valuable in places of secondary importance, the more 
 prominent spaces and panels being reserved for decoration of more 
 
 character ... o 
 
 38-48 
 
 VI. Carving in the Round Lancewood excellent for the purpose—How 
 two spoons may be carved from a single block—The fretwork 
 “horse”—Shaping the bowl and handle—Heads for walking-stick 
 handles 
 
 .. 
 
 FRET-SAWING. 
 
 Misapplication of the craft—The only suitable designs are geometrical, 
 or natural forms conventionally treated—Fret-cut panels for insertion 
 in joiners' work more appropriate than articles made up wholly of 
 bet-work How to use the tools—Finishing . 
 
 PYROGRAVURE. 
 
 I. Evolution of “Poker Work”:— Originally done on wood, with small 
 red-hot kitchen poker; then with a set of poker-like points, and, 
 finally, with heated platinum points—Pyrography is more allied to 
 etching than painting . «... 58-61 
 
 II. Tools and Materials :—Platinum the best metal for pyrogravure, no 
 
 other having its peculiar quality of absorbing the heat conveyed by 
 
 hydrocarbon vapour obtained from benzoline—Pattern points to be 
 
 had in great variety—The wood—Polishing best done by rubbing 
 
 in pure linseed oil—Dye staining—Gilding and silvering— Treating 
 
 with hot sand . - 
 
 61-64 
 
 III. Application of the Platinum Point :—The point may be con¬ 
 
 tinuously heated and regulated by means of a little hand-bellows 
 attached to machine specially made for the purpose . . 64 
 
 IV. Pyrogravure on Leather :—The burnt line differs considerably from 
 
 that on wood Excellent for leather bookbindings, and, on white or 
 brown kid, for ornamentation of small leather domestic articles 64-70 
 V Treatment of some Designs 
 
 /O 
 
CONTENTS 
 
 vu 
 
 VI. P\ROGRAVURE IN Interior Decoration :—Not only furniture, mantel¬ 
 
 pieces and the like, but ceiling, walls, doors, and even flooring may 
 be so decorated ....... 70-74 
 
 VII. GLASS Pyrogravure :—Effect similar to that of etching on glass with 
 
 ac id Special point, with inner appliances to keep it at white heat, 
 necessary—Very hard glass only available . . , 75-76 
 
 LEATHER DECORATION, 
 
 I. Stamping—Gilding—Painting :—Tools and appliances—Oil colours 
 mixed with varnishes to correspond, applied with sable brushes— 
 
 The varnishes and oil colours ..... 77-78 
 
 II. Boiled Leather Work.— The “Cuir Bouilli” of the Middle Ages— 
 
 The leather when quite soft is pressed into moulds and finally 
 shaped with wood or bone implements—Bookbinders’ and brass- 
 workers stamps and punches also used — Painting, silvering, 
 gilding, etc. ....... 78-81 
 
 III. Bookbindings: The Mosaic mode—Tooling . . . 81-84 
 
 LINCRUSTA AND ANAGLYPTA DECORATION: 
 
 Both materials may be decorated in the manner of leather . 85-87 
 
 METAL WORK. 
 
 SAW-PIERCING: 
 
 Metal is scarcely more difficult than wood to work with the fret-saw. 
 
 Cut or sawed metal useful for strap-hinges and lock-plates—Polished 
 with powdered pumice-stone and finished with rotten stone . . 88 
 
 ETCHING ON METAL. . 
 
 HAMMERED METAL: 
 
 I. Materials. Annealing: —Selection of the metal , . < 
 
 II. TOOLS AND Appliances: —The rawhide mallet—The tracers—Raising 
 tools — The cement or pitch block—The cushion—Blow lamp— 
 Spatula, or smoothing iron, etc. ..... < 
 
 III. PREPARATIONS for Work:— Preparing the metal—Attaching it to the 
 
 cement block ....... 95-96 
 
 IV. Transferring the Design . . . . . .96 
 
 V. The First Attempt :— The tracing or outlining . . , 96-97 
 
CONTENTS 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 PAGE 
 
 VI. Flat chasing 
 
 
 1 « 
 
 » 
 
 1 
 
 • 
 
 97-93 
 
 VII. Raising and modelling 
 
 
 
 • 
 
 • 
 
 ■ 
 
 98-IOO 
 
 VIII. Finishing 
 
 
 
 
 • 
 
 • 
 
 IOO-IOI 
 
 IX. The background . 
 
 
 
 • 
 
 » 
 
 • 
 
 . IOI 
 
 X. Textures . . 
 
 
 • 
 
 • 
 
 • 
 
 ■ 
 
 I 0 I-I 02 
 
 XI. Raising from the back 
 
 
 
 
 • 
 
 • 
 
 102-103 
 
 XII. Lacquering 
 
 • 
 
 • 
 
 • 
 
 • 
 
 • 
 
 I03-I04 
 
 BENT- AND LIGHT WROUGHT-IRON WORK: 
 
 Bent-iron work in its simplest form is light, and easily within scope 
 of the amateur—Known as “Venetian Ribbon Work,” and practised 
 by young ladies—Sheet-iron work heavier and rather complicated; 
 more suitable for amateur artisan .... 105-113 
 
 APPLIED DESIGN. 
 
 PREPARATORY STUDY: 
 
 Elements of Design—What is Applied Design—Can one become 
 a designer by studying at home ?—Floral and plant study, very 
 important—Constant exercise in outline-drawing of plant forms 
 necessary — Floral analysis—Literature of Art—Two valuable 
 text-books ........ 114-119 
 
 NATURAL AND CONVENTIONAL ORNAMENT: 
 
 Geometrical groundwork the common element in all good design— 
 
 Each handicraft has its peculiar limitations and differences in 
 conventionalising—The outline of the cloisonne enamel workman, the 
 decorative lead lines in painted glass, the “ couched ” outline in 
 embroidery—One can depart far from a natural form without 
 sacrificing the beauty of the motive . . . 119-121 
 
 THE CONSTRUCTION OF ORNAMENT: 
 
 The ornamentist can classify all pattern work according to its struc¬ 
 ture — The skeletons that underlie the whole mass of repeated 
 patterns are very few—The “ Drop ” match, a device to avoid the 
 monotony of a series of checkers—The “Plain” Match—The “Turn¬ 
 about” match—How to prove a design. . . 122-127 
 
CONTENTS ix 
 
 PAGE 
 
 WALL-PAPER DESIGNING: 
 
 Manufacturers generally prefer simple patterns conventionally treated 
 to floral and other naturalistic patterns needing many printings— 
 Things to avoid—Dimensions of a design—The “Repeat”—The 
 device of “Stepping” ...... 127-128 
 
 TEXTILE DESIGNING: 
 
 The three ways of applying a pattern to a fabric—Four effects or 
 shades may be gained using only black — Carpets classified for 
 designing purposes—The design or “ point ” paper—No amount of 
 good ornament in a carpet will compensate for bad colour . 129-133 
 
 TILE DESIGNING: 
 
 Classification of designs for tiles—Study of manufacturers’ illustrated 
 books of specimen patterns will give intending designers much 
 information—The smaller manufacturers most likely buyers of designs 
 by outsiders . . . . , . , . 133 
 
 PREPARATIONS OF WORKING DESIGNS: 
 
 Any mechanical means permissible—The design must be full working 
 size—Ruled or “ point ” paper necessary for carpets, oil-cloths, and 
 certain woven fabrics, but not employed for designs for wall-paper, 
 woven silk fabrics, or cretonnes, or printed fabrics—How the “ Dis¬ 
 temper ” colours are prepared—Wall-paper designs—Carpet designs 
 —Silken fabric designs—Book-cover designs (“cloth” bindings) made 
 in pen-and-ink on white Bristol board, from which a metal “ pro¬ 
 cess ” block is reproduced as a die .... 134-137 
 
 MISCELLANEOUS. 
 
 RETOUCHING PHOTOGRAPHERS’ NEGATIVES . 
 RESTORATION OF DAMAGED CHINA 
 “EXTRA-ILLUSTRATING” OR “GRANGERISING” 
 TAXIDERMY : 
 
 I. Skinning and Preparing Birds . 
 
 II. Mounting ..... 
 
 III. Insect Taxidermy .... 
 
 138- 139 
 
 139- 141 
 141-143 
 
 143-146 
 146-149 
 . 149 
 
LIST OF ILLUSTRATIONS 
 
 Modelling. 
 
 PAGE 
 
 Tools used in modelling.18 
 
 Board for relief modelling.19 
 
 Easel for relief modelling.19 
 
 Support for modelling a bust .... 20 
 
 Zinc cover for model.20 
 
 Modeller’s callipers.20 
 
 Modelling stand.20 
 
 Metal support in modelling a statuette . . 21 
 
 Rough clay sketch of a bust .... 22 
 
 Finished clay sketch of a bust .... 22 
 
 Modelling a horse from life. (From a photo¬ 
 graph) .24 
 
 Simple relief modelling in porcelain clay . . 26 
 
 Haviland vase in sculptured clay ... 26 
 
 Hammer and mallet for repousse work 
 Use of the snarling iron .... 
 Repousse bellows mount, ready for finishing 
 
 Bent- and Wrought-Iron Work. 
 Method of binding bent-iron strips . 
 
 Curves in bent-iron. 
 
 Long-nosed pliers. 
 
 Easel for menu stand in bent-iron 
 Perspective view of menu stand in bent iron 
 Illustrating vent for hanging lamp . 
 Illustrating other details for hanging lamp 
 Side-view of card-holder (design 230) 
 
 Hook for watch (design 232) 
 
 Details of hanging lamp (design 240) 
 
 PAGE 
 
 94 
 
 102 
 
 103 
 
 I0 5 
 
 10S 
 
 105 
 
 106 
 
 106 
 
 107 
 107 
 107 
 109 
 hi 
 
 Wood-Carving and Fret-Sawn Work 
 Elements of chip-carving .... 
 Motives and designs for chip-carving 
 Marks of various tools used in wood-carving 
 
 Wood-carving tools. 
 
 Position of the hands in wood-carving 
 The hands in using the mallet . 
 
 Clamps. 
 
 A wood-carver’s bench .... 
 
 Edges of shelves. 
 
 Overmantel with fret-sawn decoration 
 Mantel mirror with fret-sawn decoration . 
 Corner cabinet with fret-sawn decoration 
 Bracket with fret-sawn decoration . 
 “Occasional” table with fret-sawn decoration 
 
 Pyrogravure. 
 
 Decorated chair. 
 
 Decorated tabouret. 
 
 Leather and Lincrusta Decoration. 
 
 Sheath in “Cuir Bouilli” (16th century) . 
 
 Box in “Cuir Bouilli” (16th century. 
 
 Bible case in “Cuir Bouilli” (15th century) 
 
 Hammered Metal. 
 
 Steel raising tools. 
 
 Ring tools. 
 
 Brass raising tools. 
 
 Steel tracers . 
 
 Pearl tools. 
 
 Mats or grounding tools. 
 
 Punches. 
 
 Canaux . 
 
 Proper position of the hands for repousse work 
 
 Applied Design. 
 
 32 An element. 
 
 33 An unit. 
 
 34 A border. 
 
 34 Simple borders. 
 
 35 Ancient Egyptian border (papyrus) . 
 
 35 A rosette. 
 
 35 Rue Anemone. 
 
 35 Violets. 
 
 45 Sweet Peas. 
 
 57 Nasturtiums. 
 
 57 Pansy analysis. 
 
 57 Sweet Pea analysis. 
 
 57 Nasturtium analysis. 
 
 57 Violet analysis. 
 
 Rue Anemone analysis .... 
 Phlox analysis 
 
 ^g Pansies. 
 
 ^g Almond blossoms. Naturalistic treatment 
 
 Almond blossoms. Semi-conventional treatmen 
 Fleur-de-lis (Blue Flag.) Analysis . 
 Fleur-de-lis (Blue Flag.) Natural growth 
 79 Sweet-brier. Slightly decorative arrangemen 
 79 Diagram explaining some botanical terms 
 °° Wild rose. Nearly natural treatment 
 
 Nasturtium and leaves. Nearly natural treat 
 
 ment. 
 
 93 Demonstrations of the Anatomy Pattern. By 
 
 93 Lewis F. Day. 
 
 93 Illustration of a “ Plain ” match (for a frieze) 
 
 93 Illustration of the “ Turnabout ” match 
 93 Illustrations of the “ Drop ” match. By Lewis 
 
 93 F. Day. 
 
 93 How to prove a “ Drop ” design 
 
 93 Illustrating the “ Repeat” principle . 
 
 94 Illustrating the “ Stepping ” method . 
 
 xi 
 
 114 
 
 ii 4 
 
 n 4 
 
 n 4 
 
 n 4 
 
 114 
 
 115 
 115 
 115 
 115 
 115 
 115 
 115 
 115 
 115 
 115 
 
 115 
 
 116 
 
 11 7 
 
 118 
 118 
 118 
 118 
 120 
 
 120 
 
 124 
 
 !25 
 
 !25 
 
 126 
 
 127 
 
 128 
 
 129 
 
LIST OF ILLUSTRATIONS 
 
 xii 
 
 PAGE 
 
 Printed fabric. Four colour effects from black 
 
 alone.13° 
 
 Colouring drums used in applying designs . 130 
 
 Brussels carpet design and the “ Plant ” . . 131 
 
 Working drawing for a carpet design . . 132 
 
 Miscellaneous. 
 
 Restoration of damaged china or pottery . 
 Restoration of damaged china or pottery . 
 Tools and materials used in taxidermy 
 Skinning and preparing the bird 
 Skinning and preparing the bird 
 
 Mounting the bird. 
 
 The completed body of the bird 
 
 The bird brought up into shape on the stand 
 
 The last operation in mounting the bird . 
 
 140 
 
 141 
 
 144 
 
 145 
 
 146 
 146 
 146 
 148 
 148 
 
 LIST OF DESIGNS. 
 
 FULL-SIZE PLATES AND WORKING 
 DRAWINGS. 
 
 Wood-Carving, or Pyrogravurf. :—Chair 
 back. By C. M. Jenckes . Facing page 
 Fret-Sawn Panels :—For insertion in small 
 articles of furniture. By Gleeson White 
 
 Facing page 
 
 Boiled Leather Work (“ Cuir Bouilli ”):— 
 Chair back decoration. By L. W. Miller 
 
 Facing page 
 
 Repousse Metal Work :—By C. M. Jenckes. 
 (1) Sconce for candlestick. (2) Old-fashioned 
 sand-box, used for drying ink, in correspon¬ 
 dence . Facing page 
 
 Modelling :—High-relief panel for a fireplace 
 Modelling :—Gesso decoration. By Walter 
 
 Crane.. 
 
 Modelling :—Gesso decoration. By Walter 
 
 Crane.. 
 
 Wood-carving: —Paper-knife with “Viking” 
 decoration ....... 
 
 Wood-carving Old Celtic strap work . 
 Wood-carving :—Exercises for beginners 
 Wood-carving :—Rosettes and band of decora¬ 
 tion. By Benn Pitman .... 
 
 Wood-carving :—Edgings and Mouldings. By 
 
 Benn Pitman. 
 
 Wood-carving :—Gothic dado rail . 
 Wood-carving :—Gothic dado rail . 
 Wood-carving :—Watch-stand. By C. M. 
 
 Jenckes . . 
 
 Wood-carving :—Bands of decoration. By 
 
 Benn Pitman. 
 
 Wood-carving :—Rosettes and other decora¬ 
 tions. By Benn Pitman .... 
 
 Wood-carving :—Bands of decorations. By 
 
 Benn Pitman. 
 
 Wood-carving :—Diaper treatments. By Benn 
 
 Pitman. 
 
 Wood-carving :—Edges, mouldings, and dia¬ 
 pers. By Benn Pitman .... 
 
 47 
 
 57 
 
 79 
 
 105 
 
 25 
 
 27 
 
 29 
 
 36 
 
 37 
 
 38 
 
 39 
 
 4 1 
 
 42 
 
 43 
 
 44 
 
 46 
 
 47 
 
 48 
 
 49 
 
 50 
 
 Wood-carving :—Armchair, carved by an 
 
 amateur. 
 
 Wood-carving :—Bands of decoration. By 
 
 Benn Pitman. 
 
 Wood-carving :—End of a library stool. By 
 
 Benn Pitman. 
 
 Wood-carving :—Sherbet spoon 
 Wood-carving :—Sherbet spoon 
 Wood-carving : — Picture frame (Virginia 
 creeper). By Benn Pitman 
 Pyrogravure :—Box-top .... 
 
 Pyrogravure :—Leather cigar case 
 Pyrogravure :—Nautical decoration 
 Pyrogravure :—Tray or mat .... 
 Pyrogravure :—Napkin ring decorations 
 Pyrogravure :—Box or panel decorations 
 Pyrogravure :—Box or panel decorations 
 Pyrogravure :—Part of dining-room frieze. 
 
 By J. W. Fosdick. 
 
 Pyrogravure :—Panel decoration . 
 Pyrogravure :—Panel decoration . 
 Pyrogravure :—Various decorations 
 Pyrogravure :—Tabour top. By M. L. Ma- 
 
 comber. 
 
 Leather :—Cigar-case. 
 
 Leather :—Heraldic decoration 
 Leather :—Mosaic or painted decoration 
 Leather :—Mosaic or painted decoration 
 Leather :—Mosaic or painted decoration 
 Leather :—Tooling, from an old binding 
 Lincrusta : —Fire screen or mirror frame 
 Lincrusta :—Bronzed and tinted umbrella 
 
 holder. 
 
 Saw-Piercing :—Casket hinges 
 Saw-Piercing :—Casket hinges 
 Etched Metal :—Hinges for cabinet doors . 
 Etched Metal :—Panel . . . . 
 
 Etched Metal :—Panels of a hanging cabinet 
 Hammered Brass:—E xercise in “Tracing” or 
 
 “ Outlining ”. 
 
 Hammered Brass :—Draw handle plate . 
 Hammered Brass :—Match-box holder . 
 Hammered Brass :—Sconce with cut-glass 
 
 pendants. 
 
 Bent Iron :—Menu stand .... 
 
 Bent Iron :—Card-holder .... 
 
 Bent Iron :—Grille. 
 
 Bent Iron :—Watch-stand .... 
 
 Bent Iron :—Candlestick. 
 
 Bent Iron :—Grille. 
 
 Bent Iron :—Collar or cuff box 
 Bent Iron :—Grille for street door . 
 
 Bent Iron :—Grille for folding doors 
 Bent Iron :—Grille for street door . 
 
 Bent Iron :—Sign bracket .... 
 Bent Iron :—Hanging lamp .... 
 Sheet Iron :—Hall lantern .... 
 
 Sheet Iron :—Hall lantern . . . . 
 
 Unclassified :—Hawthorn decoration 
 Unclassified :—Hawthorn decoration 
 Unclassified :—Hawthorn decoration 
 Unclassified :—Conventional tile decorations 
 Book Covers :—Thistle motive decorations . 
 Book Covers :—Hawthorn motive decorations 
 
 PAGE 
 
 5 1 
 
 52 
 
 53 
 
 54 
 
 55 
 
 59 
 
 60 
 
 61 
 
 62 
 
 63 
 
 65 
 
 66 
 68 
 
 7 1 
 
 72 
 
 73 
 
 74 
 
 75 
 
 76 
 76 
 
 82 
 
 83 
 
 83 
 
 84 
 86 
 
 87 
 
 88 
 
 89 
 
 90 
 
 9 1 
 
 92 
 
 96 
 
 97 
 
 98 
 
 99 
 
 106 
 
 106 
 
 108 
 
 109 
 
 109 
 no 
 
 110 
 no 
 no 
 in 
 in 
 in 
 112 
 112 
 
 121 
 
 122 
 
 123 
 133 
 
 136 
 
 137 
 
MODELLING IN CLAY 
 
 17 
 
 MODELLING IN CLAY. 
 
 I. MATERIALS AND APPLIANCES. 
 
 OUR oft-expressed advice to the novice not to 
 attempt this or that branch of the graphic arts 
 without having acquired the rudiments of draw¬ 
 ing need not apply to modelling in clay—at 
 least in its first stages ; for such modelling is 
 natural drawing, and is wisely taught as such 
 to very young children in the kindergartens. 
 We need hardly say, however, that with a 
 knowledge of drawing the serious student of 
 sculpture will do much better than without it. 
 
 Lighting.—For modelling, the light is better 
 coming from above than from the side. When 
 only a side light can be obtained, it will be 
 necessary, after working on one side, to remove 
 the model so that the light may fall on the 
 other ; otherwise, if a likeness is aimed at, it 
 will be perceptible only under one particular 
 light, and from only one point of view. A 
 good portrait should strike from every aspect. 
 When working by gas or candle light, the 
 position where the light can come down upon 
 the front of the work is best. It is most safe, 
 where possible, to vary the position of the light 
 either by shifting the light or the position of 
 the model. 
 
 The Clay. —It is the fine, gray stone-ware 
 clay that is wanted. It may be bought of the 
 artists’ colourman, in boxes of various sizes. 
 For a bust, about twenty-five pounds dry weight 
 are needed ; for small objects, as a hand, foot, 
 or panel of flowers, four or five pounds will 
 suffice. If the clay is procured from a pottery, 
 see that it has been well washed. If too dry, it 
 must be soaked in water until of the consistency 
 of dough ; this result will be hastened by 
 breaking up the clay. 
 
 The Tools really necessary are but few, 
 although there is a great variety of shapes and 
 sizes. The wonderful human hand is the best 
 modelling tool of all. 
 
 Besides tools, you will need wires bent in 
 round, oval, and triangular loops, and fastened in 
 handles ; and a board to model upon, strength¬ 
 ened so that it will not warp (see fig. 180). 
 
 If you wish to model a bas-relief, use an easel 
 
 and set the board on it, having first put some 
 nails in the board to support the weight of the 
 clay ; if your work is in high relief, carry wires 
 from nail to nail. 
 
 To Model in Relief upon a plaque, it is a good 
 plan to take a shallow jelly-cake tin or the 
 cover of a paint-pail, and fill it evenly and 
 smoothly with clay. Have a good outline 
 drawing of your model. Lay the design upon 
 the surface of the clay, which should be firm 
 enough to take the impression as you trace the 
 outlines with a pin or pencil. When you have 
 traced the drawing, carefully remove the paper. 
 Then scrape away the clay all around the outline 
 to the depth of about one-eighth of an inch, 
 and proceed to work up the design, keeping 
 everything in the background as low as possible, 
 and being most careful to leave no edges stand¬ 
 ing up in such a way that the wet plaster can 
 run behind and interfere with the withdrawal 
 of the mould. When there are such projections 
 it is necessary to make the mould in separate 
 pieces, or to use a gelatine mould (to be 
 described later on). Keep your tools clean 
 during work by dipping them in a bowl of 
 water. A soft inch-wide brush dipped in water 
 will suffice to keep your work smooth. 
 
 VV hen leaving the clay upon which you arc 
 working for the day, sprinkle it, covering it 
 with a wet cloth, and placing it where it will be 
 protected from evaporation. A good way is to 
 turn a large tin basin over it. Experience will 
 soon teach you how wet to keep the clay. If 
 on returning to work it is found too dry, pour 
 watcr over it until it has absorbed enough to be 
 in good condition. 
 
 When you have finished modelling, and 
 before making the mould, remove the work from 
 the tin (which is very easily done), and place it 
 on a newspaper, setting the whole into a basin. 
 
 Tor a model in the round it is convenient to 
 have a zinc cover like fig. 183. It can be made 
 of any desired size by a tinsmith. This cover 
 being set over the model, with a bowl of water 
 beside it, the exclusion of the air and the 
 moisture rising from the bowl will keep your 
 work soft and damp enough to be perfectly 
 workable for several weeks. 
 
1 8 
 
 THE CYCLOPAEDIA OF HOME ARTS 
 
 II. WORKING FROM THE CAST. 
 
 An inanimate model is the best for the student 
 to begin with. In a living model a change is 
 constantly going on in form and expression, 
 and considerable training is necessary to enable 
 one to cope with such conditions. A square, 
 strongly marked cast of a hand or foot, how¬ 
 ever, affords an immovable as well as the 
 most serviceable subject for first lessons in 
 modelling; it can be bought at little cost, 
 of any cast-maker. 
 
 Take a board of convenient size and put 
 up the clay upon it, somewhat in the shape 
 of the object to be copied. Measurements 
 should be made to guide you in this. When¬ 
 ever you are uncertain as to a proportion, 
 measure it. Observe, first, the proportion of 
 the tvidth to the length, and block your subject 
 in roughly, in broad, square planes or flats. 
 In a foot, make one plane in the centre, from 
 the top of the instep to the toes, then a simple, 
 square plane on the outside and a broader flat 
 on the inside : block the ankle in four planes, 
 front, sides, and back of each toe in three planes, 
 and so on. The study of the flats or planes in 
 modelling is all-important, as it is the true 
 secret of the mechanical principle of the art. 
 The whole human figure, from the head to 
 the foot, is composed of a series of flats, small 
 or large, short or long, according to the pro¬ 
 portions of the body. The first principle you 
 have to master, then, in regard to your art, 
 is expressed in the square cast of the foot or 
 hand. 
 
 Different features of the face should also 
 be modelled in the same way. Casts of the 
 cy r es, nose, mouth, and so on, can all be pur¬ 
 chased for this purpose. In copying, be 
 careful to block in everything very squarely, 
 even exaggerating the planes. Try to be 
 accurate in the measurements. A pair of 
 callipers (fig. 184) will be a great aid. A 
 correct measurement in a cast is like an 
 outline in a drawing—it is the backbone 
 of the work. 
 
 In beginning a face (keeping in view always 
 the measurements of each part and the whole), 
 observe carefully the flats or planes, blocking 
 
 in the forehead first, the centre being about 
 twice as large as the sides ; the nose in three 
 flat planes, one through the centre and one 
 on each side; then one down the front of 
 the cheek-bone, extending down through .the 
 chin, and one large broad plane from the 
 termination of the cheek-bone or corner of 
 the eye, extending backward to the ear and 
 downward to the jaw-bone. After roughly 
 blocking in the face in this way, the minor 
 planes can be studied and put in. 
 
 Modelling a Bust. — In modelling a bust, 
 
 Figs. 175-179. —Tools used in Modelling 
 
 proceed on the same plan, following the flats 
 and planes, and working on the front and sides 
 alternately, keeping always in mind the pro¬ 
 portions in length and breadth and the relative 
 masses. 
 
 It will be necessary to have a revolving 
 plinth to enable you to see your work from 
 all sides and in all lights conveniently; a 
 revolving office stool shortened to a convenient 
 height, with a top provided of a heavy board 
 that will not warp, is a capital makeshift for 
 the regular thing (fig. 185). An upright 
 piece of wood, with a short cross-bar to 
 
MODELLING IN CLAY 
 
 i9 
 
 support the head and shoulders, must be 
 fastened firmly in the centre of the top. The 
 clay should be packed up as solidly as possible 
 
 Fig. 180.—Board for Relief Modelling. 
 
 with a trowel into the rough semblance of 
 the model. It is important that the core of 
 the bust should be firm and compact, as the 
 clay settles by its weight and the pressure 
 of working on it. Some persons use glue 
 water for wetting the trowel at this stage of 
 the process. When you have the rough shape 
 of the head and shoulders blocked to about 
 the right size, commence with the features 
 as seen in profile, carving out and building 
 
 Fig. 181.—Easel for Relief Modelling. 
 
 up until you have secured the correct outline, 
 taking care that it comes in the centre of the 
 face. Then turn the bust facing you and 
 
 mould the features. It is well to have 
 accurate measurements of your model, unless 
 your eye is very true. 
 
 A support that will serve can be made by 
 fixing legs on a common sieve, so that it will 
 stand over the bust without touching it. Over 
 this a wet flannel cloth can be drawn down 
 and fastened to the plinth, and the whole 
 covered with a waterproof, or anything that 
 will exclude the air. 
 
 III. WORKING FROM LIFE. 
 
 In modelling a bust from nature, place 
 your sitter not less than six feet from you, 
 so that you may see the whole head at one 
 glance. If brought nearer, only portions of 
 it can be seen at once, and one part ought 
 never to be modelled without due reference 
 to the rest, and each part should be advanced 
 equally with the others. This rule must be 
 kept constantly in mind, as it is only in this 
 way that the harmony of the whole can be 
 preserved. 
 
 The two sides of a head or face, when 
 looked at separately, are generally found to 
 be different in form. It is rarely that we sec 
 in nature a face that is in perfect drawing ; 
 but almost all have the appearance of being 
 so, because of the fact that though the form 
 may be different on either side, the weight 
 is equally distributed, which gives the effect 
 of harmony. 
 
 That it is useless to introduce details until 
 the contour has been completed applies in 
 every branch of modelling, and particularly 
 in busts. As in map-drawing, if the countries 
 are wrong, the introduction of towns and 
 rivers will not make them right. Before intro¬ 
 ducing the mouth and eyes, be sure that the 
 head is in proportion to the shoulders ; that 
 the width of the head is in proportion to 
 its length. The- nose may then be roughly 
 indicated ; after this the ears, whose position 
 at the sides of the head should be determined 
 from the nose, as the position of the ears 
 varies in different heads. In some cases 
 the ears are situated farther back from the 
 
20 
 
 THE CYCLOPAEDIA OF HOME ARTS 
 
 face than In others, and sometimes higher 
 up than in others. The opening or orifice 
 of the ear is, in some heads, in a line with 
 
 Fig. 1S2.—Support for Modelling a Bust. 
 
 the lower part of the nose, in others it is as 
 high up as the eyes. The place of the mouth 
 should be judged of from the nose, and indi¬ 
 cated near to, or distant 
 from, the nose according 
 to the length of the 
 upper lip. The eyes, 
 too, in some heads are 
 set nearer to the nose 
 than in others, and some¬ 
 times more deeply. The 
 hair must be studied 
 carefully in relation to 
 its effect in contrast 
 with the face. Study it 
 in masses, always en¬ 
 deavouring to preserve 
 the character of its move¬ 
 ment, composition, and 
 flow of lines. Do not 
 attempt to copy it in detail : to do so would 
 be most inartistic. You must not look for 
 a likeness immediately. Pay attention solely 
 
 to the proportions and balance of the masses 
 and planes, and the portrait will come. 
 
 The Full-length Figure.—For a large figure it 
 is necessary to have a plinth 
 so arranged that it will turn 
 freely on its rollers in spite of 
 the heavy weight of the clay ; 
 there must be an upright iron 
 post to support the body, and 
 to this must be fastened sup-, 
 ports for all the limbs and 
 different parts of the whole 
 figure. Plumbers’ pipe 
 answers admirably for this 
 purpose, and braided copper 
 wire for the hands and fingers. fig. 184.— 
 
 The services of an experienced Modeller’s 
 
 person should be employed Callipers. 
 
 to arrange these complicated 
 supports, for any fault in them will give serious 
 trouble. 
 
 The Stand.—It is usual to model the bust 
 without a stand, and procure the stand after 
 the work has been cast in plaster. Stands may 
 be had ready made. 
 
 In modelling the human figure, a knowledge 
 of the external muscles will be of great advan¬ 
 
 tage. This may be gleaned from anatomical 
 figures. Plaster casts of these, ranging to 
 about two feet high, can be bought. There 
 
 Model. 
 
MODELLING IN CLAY 
 
 21 
 
 is a very fine reduction about this size, by 
 Flaxman, of the Gladiator, which is most 
 useful in the study of figure-drawing or 
 modelling. In schools of art this is a favourite 
 subject to copy. 
 
 In Modelling Draped Figures much attention 
 is needed in the proper arrangement of plaits 
 and folds. In drapery one particular fold re¬ 
 quires another, where a graceful consistency is 
 maintained, as much as a given position of the 
 arm requires a particular disposition and eleva¬ 
 tion or contraction of its different muscles. 
 The best draped studies are found in casts 
 from the antique. In these the folds or plaits 
 are represented by straight rather than by 
 curved lines. Even where a fold assumes a 
 circular form, it is effected in the best models, 
 not by curved, but by broken straight lines. 
 The zigzag strokes which occur in rough or 
 unfinished sketches, whether drawn or modelled, 
 have an artistic effect which is often lost or 
 made to look mechanical where rounding off 
 or high finish is attempted. In modelling, 
 mere indications have often a more artistic 
 effect than a studied roundness. Running 
 lines, whether curved or straight, exist only 
 in inferior works of sculpture, while in the 
 works of the best masters these are carefully 
 broken up, and arranged in such manner as to 
 avoid offensive repetition. What is said here 
 with regard to drapery applies equally to the 
 hair, where balance should be maintained, but 
 repetition avoided. 
 
 The Proportions of the Figure have already 
 been considered (see Drawing from the 
 Living Model); but in sculpture, following 
 the general practice of the ancients, it is usual 
 to allow at least eight times the length of the 
 face (instead of seven) for the height of the 
 body. We say “ at least,” for in cases where 
 the effigy is to be viewed from an unusual 
 altitude (allowance being made for the conse¬ 
 quent foreshortening), more than eight times 
 the length of the face is often allowed. 
 
 Taking eight heads as the standard, an 
 idea of the proportion which the limbs should 
 bear to each other may be inferred from the 
 following numbers, which appertain to a figure 
 
 measuring five feet ten inches from head to 
 foot 
 
 From ground to ankle 
 
 2 inches 
 
 7 eighths. 
 
 From ankle to knee ... 
 
 18 „ 
 
 0 
 
 „ 
 
 From knee to hip 
 
 19 <> 
 
 2 
 
 It 
 
 From hip to collar-bone 
 
 16 „ 
 
 6 
 
 it 
 
 From collar-bone to top of head 
 
 13 .. 
 
 1 
 
 ft 
 
 Length of foot, from heel to toe 
 
 10 ,, 
 
 5 
 
 tt 
 
 Hand, finger-end to wrist-joint 
 
 8 „ 
 
 3 
 
 ft 
 
 Wrist-joint to elbow-joint 
 
 10 ,, 
 
 0 
 
 tt 
 
 Elbow to shoulder 
 
 12 ,, 
 
 0 
 
 tt 
 
 These numbers apply to casts from 
 
 antique 
 
 models of the most symmetrical kind. 
 
 Fig. i86.—Support in Modelling a Statuette. 
 
 The following method of measuring is recom¬ 
 mended to secure correct proportions : Cut a 
 stick of wood the same length as the figure 
 
22 
 
 THE CYCLOPAEDIA OF HOME ARTS 
 
 intended to be modelled, whatever its size may 
 be ; mark off the same into twenty-four equal 
 parts, then number each part in regular order 
 from end to end. 
 
 modelling clay. Be careful that the braided 
 copper wire used for supports does not any¬ 
 where come near the surface, and that the 
 work is very compact. 
 
 Fig. 1S7.—Rough Clay Sketch of a Bust. 
 
 MODELLING IN CHINA CLAY. 
 
 For small figures made to be fired, use the 
 best quality of china clay, which can usually 
 be procured at the same price as the common 
 
 Tinted Clays. —Charming work can be done 
 in tinted clays. If you live too far from a 
 pottery to avail yourself of the special machinery 
 that is used there for the incorporation of 
 
MODELLING IN CLAY » 
 
 2 3 
 
 colour with clay, you must have recourse to the these mixtures of clay with underglazc colours 
 ordinary pestle and mortar, sparing no pains (see p. 290), sending them to a pottery for trial 
 (while the colour and clay are in a powdered by fire before attempting serious work. 
 
 Fig. 187A.— Finished Clay Sketch of the Bust shown on the opposite page. 
 
 condition, as well as later, when the two have 
 been made damp) to distribute the colour 
 particles evenly throughout the clay by a 
 thorough kneading. Experiment freely in 
 
 Medallions of symbolic figures, cupids, 
 flowers, butterflies, doves, etc., can be prepared 
 for insertion or as relief decoration in the 
 following manner: Place in readiness a smooth 
 
Animal Modelling from Life. Direct Photograph taken in tfie Class-room, 
 
MODELLING IN CLAY 
 
 school slate, a roller, a pair of scissors, and a 
 penknife, oil, water, gum-arabic or tragacanth, 
 and a “slip” (clay and water mixed to a 
 smooth paste). 
 
 Keep the prepared clays, one tinted, the 
 other white, or of similar colour to the body of 
 the object about to be decorated, in a damp 
 condition by drawing over and around them 
 several folds of wetted cloth. 
 
 Roll out a thin slab of tinted clay, and stamp 
 or cut it to the required size ; should it be 
 sticky, insert a fine linen rag between it and 
 the slate. Press it face downwards to insure 
 a smooth, flat surface when it is required, and 
 cover it with another wet rag. 
 
 For original work you will have previously 
 made a model in wax, in low relief, of the 
 forms about to be moulded in white clay and 
 transferred to the tinted slab. 
 
 In this wax model you must avoid under¬ 
 cutting. Next, have cast from it, in plaster, 
 an intaglio die ; or, if copying must be resorted 
 to, we will suppose that you have selected a 
 subject from one of the small plaster medallions 
 sold by the Italian street vendors. 
 
 If a single figure has been selected from a 
 group, make an intaglio mould in plaster from 
 the whole group, and fill up the hollows about 
 the chosen portion while the plaster is wet, 
 that the chosen figure or ornament may become 
 isolated on a flat surface. A dried rush is 
 closer in texture than the finest file. Pass this 
 lightly over the face of your die to polish it 
 before varnishing, and again after the var¬ 
 nishing, that no seam or puncture may appear 
 on the tinted slab that is about to receive the 
 white impress in relief. Make sure that the 
 two clays being used are equally damp, to 
 avoid unequal contraction in drying. 
 
 After pressing the white clay within the die 
 (which must be oiled to prevent the clay from 
 adhering to it), remove carefully, with a damp 
 rag or clean brush, any particle that may have 
 fallen upon the face of the die, before pressing 
 the die upon the prepared slab. Press the 
 slab into the position it is to fill while the die 
 is yet attached to it. 
 
 If any instrument is used to assist in dc- 
 
 Design 85.-Modelling jn Clay, I’anel in High Relief, for the Decoration of a Fireplace. 
 
26 
 
 THE CYCLOPAEDIA OF HOME ARTS 
 
 taching the moulded figure from its die, remove 
 the evidence of the abrasion caused by it. 
 Should it happen that the moulded ornament 
 
 Fig. 188.—Simple Relief Modelling in Porcelain 
 Clay. 
 
 does not readily adhere to the slab, or the 
 slab attach itself as firmly as required to its 
 appointed place, mark lightly on the slab 
 beforehand, by gentle pressure with the die on 
 its surface, the exact position to be held by 
 the applied ornament in white. Make one or 
 two marks on the slab and on the mould that 
 will enable you to fit them together again with 
 precision. Roughen by scratching with a 
 pointed tool the surface plan of the ornament 
 on slab and mould, and paint into these 
 scratches the prepared slip. Then repeat the 
 process for attaching the medallion to its final 
 position. 
 
 The pressure needed to attach one clay to 
 another should be applied evenly and firmly 
 at every point. The skilled modeller adds 
 delicate lines and touches, here a little and 
 there a little, while preserving the general 
 features obtained by moulding. In like manner, 
 after transferring, for instance, the body of a 
 flying cupid in low relief by the above process, 
 a couple of butterflies in leash, or a spray of 
 vine or flowers could be delicately modelled 
 with the brush in white clay on the tinted slab, 
 after the manner of raised work in china 
 painting (see p. 279). The penknife or other 
 tool, such as those used in wax modelling, 
 
 may be had recourse to for sharpening the 
 contours. 
 
 To relieve the hard effect of a round or 
 oval slab, appropriate modelled or moulded 
 wreaths, garlands or other ornament can be 
 introduced at proportionate distances from 
 the central slab. This class of modelling 
 is usually kept free from overglaze, which is 
 liable to blur its otherwise sharp, cameo-like 
 appearance. An extreme nicety of finish is 
 imperative. 
 
 A soft camel’s-hair brush, dipped in water 
 and drawn across a squeezed sponge, is used 
 
 Fig. 189.—Vase in Sculptured Clay. 
 (By Messrs. Haviland & Co.) 
 
 for the complete blending of the outer edges 
 of the relief with the background. A few of 
 the delicately carved bone or ivory tools used 
 
MODELLING IN WAX 
 
 2 7 
 
 by modellers in wax will also be of use. In 
 skilled hands they work wonders in bringing 
 out a light or a shadow by retouching. A 
 smooth surface suffices for a background foi 
 well-moulded figures, though some kinds of 
 ornament call for an “ embossed ” background. 
 
 MODELLING IN WAX. 
 
 Wax for minute work, both in relief and in 
 the round, is an extremely useful material, and 
 when well prepared and coloured works easily 
 and produces pleasing effects. In no sense 
 can it, however, be made to supersede clay for 
 more vigorous and large work. It has the 
 especial advantage over clay of being clean 
 to handle, and the work may be put down and 
 taken up again at any time without injury 
 to the material—which does not require fie- 
 quent wetting, like clay. A medallion, for 
 instance, may be carried about in a box in 
 the pocket, and taken up for working on at 
 odd moments. 
 
 Modelling Wax.—The ordinary kind—it may 
 be bought of any artists’ colourman—is made 
 in the proportion of 8 oz. yellow wax, I oz. 
 Burgundy pitch or white (not spirits of) tui pen- 
 tine, and \ oz. lard, melted at a low heat, so as 
 not to bubble, the ingredients being well stirred 
 in, and red lead, in powder, used to colour it. 
 When perfectly mixed the wax is turned out 
 on a slab to cool. 
 
 The best recipe, perhaps, is as follows: 
 i lb. yellow beeswax, i oz. Venice turpen¬ 
 tine, I oz. Burgundy pitch, i oz. white 
 lead, i oz. yellow ochre (dry powder), I oz. 
 powdered corn-starch, \ oz. tallow. A little 
 red lead may be used as colouring-matter. 
 A perfect mixture, with heat as dcsciibed 
 in the previous recipe, is necessary. If the 
 compound comes out too hard, a little more 
 Burgundy pitch and tallow may be used to 
 soften it. 
 
 “ Composite Clay.” —Lor small statuettes and 
 all ordinary work of the sort there is an ex¬ 
 cellent composition, made mainly of fine model¬ 
 ling clay, mixed with lard and othei ingredients. 
 
 This may be obtained so cheaply and of 
 such good quality of dealers in the ordinary 
 modelling clay that it is hardly worth while for 
 the student to experiment in making it. It is 
 known as “composite clay. It has some of 
 the qualities of putty, in that it gets soft by the 
 warmth of the hand, and hardens again on 
 cooling, but it does not stick to the fingers and 
 does not crumble. It has the advantage over 
 clay of not requiring to be kept wet and of 
 keeping its shape for any length of time, and 
 over wax of being unaffected by ordinary 
 changes of temperature and of being workable 
 with ordinary tools. The finer work in wax 
 has to be done with iron tools heated in the 
 (lame of an alcohol lamp. 
 
 Design 86.—Modelling in Gesso. Panel by Walter 
 Crane. 
 
 Composite clay may be procured of two 
 qualities, hard or soft; the harder sort being 
 that best adapted for very fine work. 
 
28 
 
 TIIE CYCLOPEDIA OF HOME ARTS 
 
 MODELLING (PAINTING) IN GESSO. 
 
 Gesso of the old-fashioned kind is a prepa¬ 
 ration of whiting and size, resembling putty. 
 Employed as a painting ground by the old 
 masters, it has been revived as a most con¬ 
 venient material for modelling in low relief—or 
 rather painting; it attaches itself to any kind 
 of surface, and is delightfully pliant. A firm 
 foundation is absolutely necessary. Wood, 
 plaster, or canvas will do. For fine work wood 
 is best. Simple as it is, gesso is an artist’s 
 process. 1 
 
 A smooth surface having been laid with 
 gesso and allowed to become dry, the design 
 may be transferred to its surface by pouncing 
 or by use of stencil plates, or else drawn directly 
 with a lead pencil. Wood mantels, panels of 
 clocks or other decorative pieces of furniture 
 and vases are particularly suitable for treat¬ 
 ment. Designs are often executed on coarse 
 canvas, and panels of doors and over-doors and 
 spandiels of arches filled in with them. Frames 
 oi miirors used as sconces are sometimes very 
 effectively decorated in this way in low relief. 
 They may be bronzed afterwards. 
 
 Two pieparations of gesso which have been 
 found to work may be described. The first is 
 very simple, and is a mixture of fine Italian 
 plaster of Paris and glue. Dilute the glue with 
 hot water, then mix with the plaster until it is 
 of the consistency of cream ; a little glycerine 
 added will prevent shrinking and cracking. 
 Lay a coat of size or of thin lacquer on the 
 panel or canvas before going to work. The 
 second is a much firmer and harder gesso, and 
 is made by boiling one part powdered resin, 
 four parts linseed oil, six parts melted glue. 
 Mix the whole well together. Too much care 
 cannot be taken with this latter mixture. Soak 
 whiting in water, and add it to the prepared 
 mixtuie until it is also of the consistency of 
 cream I he quality of whiting is to be varied 
 or modified in proportion to the degree of 
 
 fluidity required in the character of the work. 
 The second mixture has many advantages 
 over the former. It is slower in drying, giving 
 one more time for final finish. It is better for 
 delicate work. It sets more firmly, and takes 
 a finer polish when hard. Combined with 
 Naples Yellow, it bears a great resemblance to 
 ivory. 
 
 In England painting on gesso has been 
 largely applied to the enrichment in relief of 
 walls and ceilings of mansions, and this in many 
 instances by young ladies both as amateurs and 
 professionals. Walls and ceilings are divided 
 into panels formed also in gesso, a trailing 
 flowering plant often being very suitable for 
 the purpose, while the frieze may be formed of 
 processional figures or scrolls and leafage. 
 Meandering tendrils in the Louis Quinze style, 
 delicate and lightsome,are excellent for divisions 
 of ceilings. Wall panels may have corner- 
 pieces and central figures, but they also admit 
 of large and imposing tableaux, for there is 
 no limit in the way of relief work in gesso. 
 Abundant pictorial designs may be met with 
 in metallic relief plaques, in carvings, engravings, 
 and in porcelain and fa'ience statuettes. For 
 the chief masses of the design, it is best to lay 
 on at the outset the whole amount of material 
 lcquiied, thus saving time and labour in the 
 shaping. 
 
 Water colours are preferable to oil colours in 
 painting the relief u’ork ; for these no prepara¬ 
 tion of the ground is necessary. Oil colours 
 require the previous laying on of a coat of 
 shellac. For gilding, a thin coat of oil gold 
 size is to be laid on. 
 
 Fut of all the finishes employed, and the 
 special feature of the revival of the art, lacquers 
 of various colours prepared for the purpose are 
 the most beautiful. These metallic lustres give 
 a unique effect to the finished work, recallina 
 Limoges enamels. 
 
 PLASTER CASTS. 
 
 At the exhibitions of The Arts and Crafts, Sir Fd\ 
 Burne-Jones, Mr. Walter Crane,andMr. Spencer Stan! 
 have been notable contributors in this form of decora 
 
 I. FROM THE CLAY MODEL. 
 
 To. make a plaster cast, first prepare a 
 quantity of plaster mixed with water to the 
 
30 
 
 THE CYCLOPAEDIA OF HOME ARTS 
 
 consistency of a thick cream. Apply this little 
 by little to the object until the plaster is of the 
 proper thickness—a quarter of an inch or more, 
 according to the size of the piece. The plaster 
 must be kept stirred from time to time, to 
 avoid the formation of lumps and bubbles. If 
 the object is a complicated one, such as a group, 
 it is best to cut the clay or wax model into 
 simpler parts with a fine wire, and mould each 
 of these separately ; otherwise there may be 
 great danger of breaking. But each portion 
 before the group is taken asunder should be 
 marked, so that it may be easy to adjust the 
 various pieces of the cast in their proper places ; 
 or the same end may be attained in simpler 
 pieces without cutting the clay, by stopping off 
 the plaster along certain lines with bands of 
 wet clay dusted with dry plaster, so that they 
 may not stick too much to the figure. 
 
 Thus a bust may be moulded in two sections, 
 dividing it by means of a clay band running 
 from the top of the head, behind the ears, and 
 down the neck and shoulders. When the front 
 half has been moulded, the band is taken off 
 and another supplied exactly on the other side 
 of the dividing line. The liquid plaster is 
 applied with a brush. When it reaches a 
 thickness of a quarter of an inch it is well to 
 apply a thin coat of wet clay, so that in breaking 
 up the mould, as will be explained presently, 
 you may know when you are approaching the 
 proof within. Outside the clay the plaster 
 may be put on thickly, and as much of it as may 
 be judged necessary to make a solid mould, 
 which may be further strengthened by encasing 
 lengths of iron or copper wire in it, running 
 in various directions. The wires should be 
 varnished. Lengths of hempen thread or twine 
 are often used instead. 
 
 The two parts, as we will suppose, of the 
 first mould having been obtained, they are 
 coated on the inside with soap water—that is, 
 black soap dissolved in hot water, boiled and 
 well skimmed. This is to prevent the plaster 
 from absorbing too great a quantity of olive 
 oil, when a proof is to be obtained. Two coats 
 of oil are, nevertheless, often necessary to 
 prevent the plaster of the proof from adhering 
 
 to that of the mould. This done, each part of 
 the mould is well coated with plaster on the 
 inside, the two are brought together, tied firmly, 
 and left for twenty-four hours. The mould is 
 then chipped away with chisel and mallet, the 
 couch of clay enabling the worker to knock off 
 the greater part of it without endangering the 
 proof within. The clay is picked off with the 
 fingers, and then the inner coating is removed 
 with very great care. 
 
 You now have a cast of your original clay 
 model; but for all your care it will, very likely, 
 be imperfect in places ; besides, it is only one 
 cast, and you need a set of moulds from which 
 you can take any number of casts. Again, the 
 white plaster discovers slight defects of model¬ 
 ling which may have passed unnoticed in the 
 clay. This first proof may therefore be con¬ 
 sidered pretty much as a sketch, to be further 
 worked upon and corrected. This is done by 
 applying wet plaster wherever needed with a 
 brush, and working upon it when dry with the 
 steel tools, chisels, and files, used also by the 
 sculptor in marble. Very much may be done 
 in this way which would be difficult or im¬ 
 possible in the clay. 
 
 The moulds of the second set, made from the 
 finished proof, are not intended to be broken. 
 They are therefore made in many pieces, 
 which may be detached one by one without 
 danger of breaking. Thus a mask may be 
 divided into as many as a dozen pieces, each 
 side of the nose being moulded separately, 
 each cheek, the hollows under the eyes, the 
 chin, the ears, the forehead in three pieces. 
 Each section, being outlined on the first proof, 
 is oiled (the proof having first been treated with 
 soap water), and the plaster is put on as before, 
 only thinly. The piece thus obtained is 
 trimmed at the edges, oiled, reapplied on the 
 proof, and then the plaster is applied on the 
 pieces next to it, coming, of course, exactly 
 up to the edges of the first. These pieces are 
 firmly tied together for the casting, which pro¬ 
 ceeds as before, but which should result in a 
 perfect cast when the different pieces of the 
 mould are carefully picked away from it. Lines 
 will, however, often show in relief on the cast 
 
PLASTER CASTS 
 
 3 1 
 
 at the junctures, and these have to be carefully 
 removed, and the surface made even with emery 
 paper. 
 
 II. FROM LIFE. 
 
 To make a plaster cast from the life is a 
 matter of some difficulty, because it has to be 
 done quickly. The skin must be well oiled, so 
 that the plaster will not adhere to it; in the 
 case of a hirsute male model, it is even well to 
 use butter or oleomargarine, and to apply it 
 somewhat thickly. In taking a mask of the 
 face, mouth and eyes must be kept closed, and 
 the nostrils must be stopped with wax, through 
 which quills arc inserted for the model to 
 breathe through. An arm must be well sup¬ 
 ported at the wrist and elbow, for the weight of 
 the plaster is considerable, and the special 
 difficulty of the work is due to involuntary 
 movements of the muscles trying to adjust 
 themselves to this weight, which causes the 
 plaster to slip. For the same reason the more 
 quickly the work is done the better. 
 
 To make the plaster set quickly, mix some 
 powdered alum with it. Common salt would 
 do, and its use is sometimes recommended ; 
 but it adds to the adhesive property of the 
 plaster, and more oil or grease must be used, 
 which makes it impossible to attain the natural 
 texture that a cast from the life should have. 
 You must decide quickly about the number 
 and shape of the pieces into which the shell is 
 to be divided, so that it may be withdrawn 
 easily from the model. A waxed silk thread 
 is to be used for cutting ; but since the shell 
 cannot be made very thick, breakages fre¬ 
 quently occur, and much skill is necessary in 
 putting together the pieces of the mould in 
 order to get a cast from them. 
 
 The interior surface of the mould must be 
 coated with shellac to render it less absorp¬ 
 tive, and must be freshly oiled before using. 
 It is useful, in addition, to mix a little colour 
 in the plaster that is prepared for the cast, 
 so that if even a trace of it adheres to the 
 inside of the mould it will be detected, in 
 which case it is to be carefully removed with 
 
 a sharp penknife blade, and adjusted in its 
 proper place on the cast ; for, as before said, 
 the special beauty of a cast from life is in its 
 natural surface. 
 
 A very slight addition of yellow and red 
 ochres in powder will give something like the 
 warm hue of flesh. 
 
 Everything depends upon the quickness and 
 upon the thorough mixture of the plaster. 
 Plenty of it should be in readiness, and it 
 should be mixed as thickly as the water will 
 hold, leaving just an inch or so of water at the 
 top of the bucket. 
 
 III. GELATINE MOULDS FOR PLASTER 
 CASTS. 
 
 Gelatine moulds are made of small objects, 
 for the purpose of avoiding the trouule of 
 having moulds in several parts. The object 
 moulded from, whether of plaster or other 
 material, should always be oiled. It may then 
 be dipped in a solution of gelatine, and when 
 the coating has solidified, other coats may be 
 applied by a brush until it is thick enough. It 
 is cut with a sharp knife in order to remove it ; 
 but, as it is elastic, it need not be cut into 
 separate pieces. 
 
 If you have never watched the process, you 
 may find it difficult to make a gelatine mould 
 from printed directions, but we trust that the 
 following hints will be found helpful: Soak 
 one pound of gelatine in water until it has 
 absorbed as much as it can, which it will do in 
 four or five hours. Then apply a gentle heat 
 until it is thoroughly liquefied. If you want an 
 elastic mould, add four and a quarter ounces 
 of treacle, which must be well mixed with the 
 gelatine while hot. If you want a solid mould, 
 omit the treacle and add powdered chrome 
 alum—an ounce to an ounce and a half. 1 he 
 alum prevents the gelatine from being again 
 dissolved in water. If a saturated solution of 
 bichromate of potash be brushed over the 
 surface of the mould and allowed to dry 
 thoroughly, then exposed to sunlight for a few 
 minutes, the mould will become so hard as to 
 be unaffected by water. 
 
3 2 
 
 THE CYCLOPAEDIA OF HOME ARTS 
 
 WOOD-CARVING. 
 
 I. CHIP- OR NOTCH-CARVING. 
 
 Wood-carving is easily learned, the tools and 
 materials are inexpensive, and the articles 
 decorated not only can always find a place 
 in the home, but are often saleable. 
 
 Fig. 192. 
 
 Fig. 190 shows how to set out a row of right-angled triangles 
 (fig. 191) ; they are doubled in fig. 192, to form a row 
 of diamonds. Make them the size shown ; for, at first, it 
 will be found easier to cut the wood sharply from a small 
 space than from a large one—as in fig. 194, for instance. 
 
 Modelling in clay or wax is an excellent, 
 and indeed almost necessary, preparation for 
 the higher branches of carving: carving is 
 only sculpture in wood. Chip- or notch-carving 
 
 Excellent work may be done with one simple tool: a hook- 
 bladed knife, made by grinding down an ordinary shoe¬ 
 maker’s knife, and setting it in a longer handle, will do. 
 
 is the most elementary form of wood-carving— 
 the “ whittli ng ” of our boyhood. 1 To be more 
 
 1 It is to be borne in mind, however, that wood-carving 
 proper is so much bolder and larger than chip-carving 
 that it may be said to be a different art. For this reason 
 some teachers believe that instruction in wood-carving 
 should precede chip-carving, which can easily be learned 
 afterward. 
 
 precise, chip-carving consists of ornamenting 
 wooden surfaces usually, but not necessarily, 
 flat, by cutting various-shaped notches to form 
 a geometrical design. The notches are nearly 
 always made on the slant at the same angle, so 
 that they meet at the base in the form of a V, 
 varying in size and depth according to the 
 requirements of the design. 
 
 Chip-carving is so simple that little children 
 in the kindergartens learn to do it easily. It 
 entails no mental strain or fatigue, nor appara¬ 
 tus or preparations. No workman’s bench is 
 required, nor, except for the flying chips, is 
 there any suggestion of the workshop; you 
 may sit at the table in the common living- 
 room and whittle away without noise or annoy¬ 
 ance to those about you. 
 
 Fig. 194.—Elements of Chip-Cakving. 
 
 The notches are nearly always made on the slant, from op¬ 
 posite directions, at such an angle that they meet at the 
 bottom, and form a V-shaped cut. 
 
 The peasants of Norway and Sweden, who 
 produce wonderful decorations by simple notch¬ 
 carving, generally use an ordinary pocket-knife. 
 A hook-bladed knife, something like a small 
 pruning-knife, is a favourite implement. But 
 there are the easily obtained tools of the pro¬ 
 fessional wood-carver, and it is well to begin at 
 once to learn how to handle them. With a 
 small V, or parting, tool, and a veiner, you are 
 equipped for all ordinary work. If you intend 
 to make your own designs—and in that lies 
 much of the pleasure of the chip-carver—a 
 knowledge of at least the elements of geometry 
 
CHIP-CARVING 
 
 33 
 
 Figs. 195-201. —Motives and Designs for Notch- or Chip-Carving. 
 
 The little “nicks” indicated in the drawing (usual in German work) are not necessary to the designs, and may be omitted 
 altogether. In the opinion of many, they are a trifling attempt at ornament which detracts from the simplicity which 
 should characterise chip-carving. 
 
THE CYCLOPAEDIA OF HOME ARTS 
 
 34 
 
 is necessary, and you should be handy with 
 rule, set square, and compass. 1 
 
 Wood—The most suitable woods for general 
 purposes are lime and holly ; pear, walnut, and 
 plane are also good. After some practice, oak 
 will be available ; it is too hard for the be¬ 
 ginner, who would do better to go rather to the 
 other extreme and use American white wood 
 for his first attempts, although that will be 
 found too soft for serious work. 
 
 The wood must be well dressed and made 
 perfectly smooth with the smoothing-plane. 
 Do not use sandpaper, for particles of sand 
 
 Chise/9 Flat Gouges Hollow Gouges 
 
 Shew Chisato 
 
 Fig. 202.—Marks of Various Tools used in 
 Wood-Carving. 
 
 are apt to lodge in the grain and injure, later, 
 the edges of the tools. 
 
 For a First Attempt select a strip of (half-inch 
 thick) white wood about nine inches long and 
 six wide. Clamp it to the edge of the table to 
 hold it firm, and use a strip of thin wood—a 
 piece of a cigar-box would do—between the 
 clamp and the wood, to avoid scratching. 
 
 Let each cut into the wood be clean and 
 complete. Cut boldly from the outline to 
 the centre—never from the centre to the 
 outline—and always uniformly at the exact 
 angle. ^ Curved notches are more difficult. 
 Whatever the notch, the desired depth should 
 
 1 In Miss Eleanor Rowe’s “ Manual of Chip-Carving” 
 (R. Sutton & Co.), which we can cordially recommend, 
 much attention is given to the geometrical side of the 
 subject. 
 
 be reached by a single cut. To cut a second 
 or, worse still, a third time will produce a 
 slovenly effect ; and although irregularities 
 
 Figs. 203, 204.—Wood-Carving Tools. V or 
 Parting Tool and Flat Gouge. 
 
 caused by bungling may be rectified by subse¬ 
 quent paring, evidences of the corrections will 
 be more or less apparent. 
 
 Among the various objects for domestic 
 use which may be decorated with chip-carving 
 may be mentioned book-racks, newspaper- 
 racks ; mirror, photograph, and other picture 
 frames; bread-platters, tea-trays, flower-pot 
 stands, clock-cases, barometer-frames, blotters, 
 and paper-knives. Be careful not to decorate 
 too great a part of the object in hand. In all 
 good decoration the ornament is the more 
 valuable the more it is brought in contrast with 
 considerable plain surfaces. 
 
 Finishing.—After the carving is done, sand¬ 
 paper the surface of the wood not decorated 
 but not the notches. From the latter remove 
 the dust that will have accumulated, using a 
 stiff brush for the purpose. 
 
 Polishing.—Do not varnish the work—it will 
 give it a common look ; to oil soft wood causes 
 
 Figs. 205, 206.—Hollow Gouge and Firmer or 
 Flat Chisel. 
 
 it to catch the dust. A dead wax polish is 
 preferable. For this, use warm beeswax in 
 turpentine, and rub the mixture over the carving 
 with a woollen rag. 
 
 Perhaps there is not very much art in chip- 
 
WOOD-CARVING 
 
 35 
 
 carving; but it teaches accuracy of obser¬ 
 vation, precision of touch in handling the tools, 
 and how to work freely from the wrist—all 
 valuable qualities for the practice of wood¬ 
 carving proper, which we will now consider. 
 
 II. TOOLS AND APPLIANCES. 
 
 It is best for the wood-carver to have a small 
 outfit of tools at first, and to master the use of 
 each tool singly, finding out everything that 
 can be done with it. It is not with the elaborate 
 “ set of tools” with finely polished handles, in a 
 
 Fig. 207.—Position of 
 .the Hands. 
 
 Fig. 208.—The Hands in 
 using the Mallet. 
 
 beautiful box, that the best work is done. 
 These are made especially for amateurs, but 
 we advise amateurs to have nothing to do with 
 them ; for, as a rule, they are only toys. Buy 
 the tools made for professional carvers. The 
 following will be sufficient, for a beginning at 
 least: one nine-sixteenth and one five-six¬ 
 teenth firmer or flat chisel ; one six-sixteenth 
 corner chisel or skew ; a nine-sixteenth and 
 six-sixteenth flat gouge ; a six-sixteenth hollow 
 gouge, and a three-sixteenth V, or parting, tool. 
 You will also need a slip of oil-stone formed to 
 fit the concave tools ; a mallet, and a pair of 
 coachmaker’s iron clamps, No. 14 ; a little oil, 
 and a sheet of black transfer paper. 
 
 The Transfer Paper is not an expensive item, 
 but you can make it for yourself by mixing 
 lampblack and castor-oil to form a thick paste, 
 and then applying it to one side of a piece of 
 newspaper, gently wiping off the surplus grease 
 with a piece of rag. 
 
 The Carver’s Bench may be a strong kitchen 
 table with a stout pine top. In this case the 
 
 legs should be secured to the floor with small 
 iron brackets, to ensure rigidity. The drawer 
 can be used in place of a tool chest. 
 
 For those who would prefer to have the 
 regular carver’s bench, we would say that it 
 
 should not be less than 4 ft 6 in. long, 2 ft. 
 wide, and from 2 ft. 6 in. to 3 ft. high. The 
 legs should be of pine, 4 in. square, with cross 
 pieces of the same size, dowelled and fastened 
 with what are known as lag screws. The top 
 should be of pine about 2 in. thick, perfectly 
 level and well seasoned, and on the front edge 
 should be fastened, by means of the lag screws 
 before mentioned, a piece of pine 3 in. square, 
 having slots in. long by | in. deep, cut 
 out on the inner side. A thin piece of pine 
 should be nailed along the back and continued 
 along the ends for about a foot, and projecting 
 1 \ in. above the top of the bench, to prevent 
 the tools from rolling off. 
 
 The Tool Chest is usually made with three 
 shallow top drawers for holding spare tools, 
 slips, etc., and a large bottom drawer or cup¬ 
 board for odds and ends. 
 
 Fig. 210.—A Wood-Carver’s Bench. 
 
 “ Holdfast ” and “ Bench Screw.”—The means 
 adopted for fastening the work to the bench 
 vary, but most professional carvers use either a 
 “ holdfast,” a “ bench screw,” or “ bolts ” ; and 
 
36 
 
 THE CYCLOPAEDIA OF HOME ARTS 
 
 although these articles are not perhaps abso¬ 
 lutely necessary for the amateur carver, they 
 are of sufficient importance to merit more than 
 a passing notice. 
 
 The “ bench screw ” is more useful and less 
 clumsy than the “ holdfast,” and answers the 
 same purpose. This appliance, however, is 
 only suitable for certain descriptions of work 
 which are not too heavy. 
 
 “Bench Bolts.”—The best contrivances are 
 the “ bench bolts,” consisting of two pieces of 
 steel 10 in. long, i£ in. wide and f in. thick, 
 to fit into the slots in the edge of the bench. 
 A spring on the side prevents the bolts from 
 slipping, and the projecting heads allow work 
 
 the tool in the right hand, keeping the wrist al¬ 
 most down on the wood, and with the thumb and 
 forefinger of the left hand—or the whole of the 
 hand, which is sometimes necessary—guiding 
 the tool and pressing gently, go slowly along, 
 and you will remove a thin, curled shaving. 
 Try to cut these shavings of even thickness, in 
 a uniform, straight groove. Do not move the 
 tool from side to side in the wood. The beginner 
 is very apt to do so when the tool does not 
 glide easily—it is a bad habit to acquire. 
 
 When you have succeeded in cutting several 
 of these grooves, straight, and uniform in width, 
 rule lines for similar grooves across the grain. 
 You will find them harder to cut, for the tool 
 
 of almost any size to be securely and firmly 
 fixed ; the screw through the head of one of 
 the bolts affording means of at once releasing 
 or tightening the work. 
 
 With our modest kitchen table and coach- 
 maker’s clamps—which are all that is necessary, 
 at least for carving small articles—we will dis¬ 
 pense with all these appliances. 
 
 III. PRELIMINARY PRACTICE-CARE OF 
 TOOLS. 
 
 Take a board of common pine, about 16 in. 
 long, io in. wide, and i in. thick, and fasten it 
 firmly to your table by means of the clamps. 
 Rule a few straight lines from end to end of the 
 board | in. apart. Take the hollow gouge and 
 hollow these spaces out, holding the handle of 
 
 will meet with more resistance ; but after a few 
 trials you will succeed. 
 
 Now turn the board over, make a few circles, 
 and gouge them out around the outside edge. 
 This will be more difficult still, but from this 
 practice you will soon become familiar with the 
 use of the gouge. 
 
 By this time it will have lost something of 
 its sharpness, and it will not be out of place to 
 give here a few hints about 
 
 Grinding and Setting Tools.—Chisels are 
 ground on both sides to a long, thin wedge— 
 that is to say, about a quarter of an inch of the 
 flat surface is bevelled toward the cutting edge. 
 Gouges are held to the grindstone at an angle 
 to make a bevel of about a quarter of an inch 
 on the convex side, on which side they are 
 always ground. This is perhaps the most 
 
WOOD-CARVING 
 
 awkward task for beginners. To sharpen a 
 gouge properly requires much care and practice, 
 as a gouge correctly sharpened should have a 
 perfect curve. 
 
 The line formed by the cutting edge, as well 
 as the bevel, should be carefully preserved. 
 To secure this the tool should be constantly 
 turned from side to side while grinding, without 
 being lifted during the process. The tools are 
 now given their keen cutting edge by gently 
 rubbing them backward and forward on the 
 oil-stone at the same angle at which the tool is 
 ground. Do not press too hard, or you will 
 have a jagged edge like a saw. In setting 
 tools you should turn them first one way and 
 then reverse them between the fingers and 
 thumb as they pass along the stone. Do not 
 rub the gouges on the inside with the stone, 
 unless it is to remove a jagged edge. Even 
 then great care must be taken, and the stone 
 should perfectly fit the concave side of the tool. 
 It is not advisable for beginners to grind their 
 own tools. If they are obtained in good con¬ 
 dition they can be easily kept so, with a little 
 attention and care. Tools only require to be 
 ground when they become very blunt or broken. 
 Take good care that the edges of your tools 
 do not rub against each other. They should 
 be always laid parallel, whether in use or not. 
 After using the oil-stone wipe it well with a 
 rag or shaving, to free it from grease. 
 
 IV. SURFACE DECORATION. 
 
 In surface-carving, or “carving in the flat,” 
 the design is merely outlined, not modelled. 
 Perhaps the most artistic kind of surface-carving 
 is that done, after the fashion of the old Norse¬ 
 men, in the “Dragon” 1 or “Viking” style. 
 
 1 The first name refers to the most characteristic motive 
 of the Norse designs, which is a much conventionalised 
 writhing serpent with a dragon-like head ; or rather we 
 might say a series of such serpents inextricably combined 
 to form a sort of strap pattern. The second name is due 
 to the fact that the Norse Vikings made elaborate use of 
 this kind of decoration—on the garments of their women 
 and in their domestic surroundings, as well as on their 
 ships and arms. 
 
THE CYCLOPAEDIA OF HOME ARTS 
 
 38 
 
 As the beauty of a design of this sort depends 
 chiefly on the perfection of the outline, you 
 cannot be too careful in the drawing. 
 
 Having made the design on paper, transfer 
 it to the wood. To do this, place it in the 
 exact position it is to occupy on the panel, and 
 under it put a sheet of black transfer-paper ; 
 then with the pencil, or a dull ivory point, 
 or, better still, an agate stylus, go carefully 
 over every line of the design, and, according 
 to the accuracy with which the tracing is 
 made, the outline will be transferred to the 
 wood. 
 
 Take your smallest-sized veining or V tool, 
 and follow' the outline very carefully all around 
 the design ; make a clean cut, uniform in depth 
 and wddth, following the line as accurately and 
 as closely as you can without destroying it. 
 Afterward go over this groove outline and 
 deepen it; then, with a flat gouge follow the 
 sharp edges left on the background by the 
 veining tool and smooth them into the back¬ 
 ground. To give contrast between the pattern 
 and the background—for there will be no 
 variation in the relief—stamp the background 
 with a fine stamp. Under ordinary circum¬ 
 stances we do not advise the use of the stamping 
 tool, for it renders wood-carving too mechanical; 
 but in such a case as this it seems to be 
 necessary. 
 
 Having finished the stamping, take up the 
 flat gouge again to represent the intersecting 
 portions of the design, which is done by sloping 
 the parts that run under down toward the 
 parts that are to be represented as crossing 
 them. 
 
 Rulers, paper-knives, and tea-trays are usually 
 the first things decorated in the “ Viking ” style; 
 as in this kind of carving there are no pro¬ 
 jections of relief to split off, it is particularly 
 suitable for the decoration of any articles of 
 furniture subject to much contact with the 
 person. 
 
 Surface-carving may be used on woods after 
 they have received their finish, as for the 
 decoration of work-boxes, handkerchief-boxes 
 >nd glove-boxes, chairs and small table-tops, 
 photograph-frames, book-racks and footstools. 
 
 V. RELIEF-CARVING. 
 
 The general and perhaps most artistic method 
 of carving is in such relief that the design, when 
 completed, appears wholly raised above the 
 
 Design 91.—Simple Exercise 
 for a Beginner. 
 
 Make the diamonds 1 in. square. 
 
 (See p. 30.) 
 
 “ground,” the background 
 having been lowered or 
 cut away to a uniform 
 depth. Transfer the de¬ 
 sign carefully. In order 
 to cut away the back¬ 
 ground, the dead wood 
 must be separated from 
 the pattern edges. Take 
 a gouge and go around 
 the outside of the design 
 £ in. aw^ay from the lines, 
 cutting carefully with the 
 grain, say § in. in depth, 
 and being very careful 
 the gouge does not slip, 
 
 ERCISE FOR A BEGINNER. 
 
 Make the diamonds 2 in. 
 square, and the plain 
 bands J in. wide. (See 
 p. 32.) 
 
40 
 
 THE CYCLOPAEDIA OF HOME ARTS 
 
 as it may cut away a portion of the design. 
 This gouging or trenching is to allow the 
 background to break away easily when you 
 are stabbing out, or, as it is properly termed, 
 “ kurfing,” the pattern. If this trenching is not 
 done, the design is liable to break away before 
 the background. Next take a flat chisel and 
 “kurf” the design out all around in a con¬ 
 tinuous line, sloping the chisel at a slight angle 
 (see fig. 208) and driving it with the mallet 
 toward the groove you have previously cut. 
 In releasing the tool, move it from end to end 
 sidewise, not flatwise, as you are liable to break 
 the tool. Sharp curves should be “ kurfed ” 
 with the gouge, or any of the tools that will fit 
 the exact form of the line to be cut. 
 
 Now to remove the background. This is 
 called “ grounding,” or cutting away the dead 
 wood. Take the flat gouge and remove the 
 wood. The corners and sharp angles can be 
 cleared away with the skew chisel. Do not 
 splinter your wood ; do not dig it, but take it 
 off in clean cuts. Try always to cut with the 
 grain, making it smooth and level. 
 
 After the background has been removed, go 
 over the whole design, cutting those parts under 
 which are overlapped. 
 
 The work is now in condition to be modelled. 
 Do not attempt to finish any one part. Study 
 the whole design carefully. Supposing that it 
 is one of flowers and foliage, cut under all 
 those parts that are concealed by others. 
 Give to each the depression it will have in 
 the finished work. Each part should be 
 cleanly cut with one stroke of the tool, leaving 
 the permanent form nicely smoothed before it 
 is veined. 
 
 Trim down the stems to their proper size; 
 see that they are neatly attached to the leaves; 
 finish all the stronger parts first, leaving all 
 little stems till the last, as they are liable to be 
 knocked off; smooth up the work with a well- 
 sharpened tool, and it is then ready to receive 
 the finish. 
 
 Two very simple exercises for beginners are 
 shown on page 38. In the first we have a 
 simple band of bevelled points, leaving a row of 
 diamonds in the centre. Take a narrow chisel 
 
 and hold it vertically, setting it at the inside 
 point of the level; cut straight down to an equal 
 depth on each side, sloping to the outside 
 edge. Then holding the chisel in the position 
 shown in fig. 207, cut from the outside edge 
 down to the centre. To cut the point clean, 
 use your narrow bevelled chisel. Always work 
 with the bevelled side of the chisel down, and 
 be careful to hold it flat on this bevel ; other¬ 
 wise you will wear it off round. Try to cut 
 with a firm, even stroke. One cut is better 
 than two, if it will do the work. 
 
 In design 92 we have an example in which 
 the conventionalised flower forms require slight 
 modelling. Get the centre of the diamond and, 
 holding the medium gouge straight and turning 
 it once, cut the “ boss ” in the centre of the 
 figure. Outline the petals with the flat gouge, 
 setting the tool at the point where the petals 
 join, and cutting to the outside point. The 
 width and the sweep of the tool with a little 
 handling will give the outline required. With the 
 chisel bevel around the edges deep enough to get 
 an effect of light and shade. Make the straight 
 cut indicated in the middle of each petal with 
 the V tool, cutting toward the boss, and 
 making the cut deepest at the centre. Model 
 the flower with one cut on each half-petal with 
 the medium gouge. Round slightly the sharp 
 edges of the boss in the centre. Draw the 
 diamonds two inches square and the plain 
 bands half an inch wide. 
 
 Finishing is best done with raw linseed oil 
 applied with a bristle brush, as much being 
 used as the wood will absorb. Three or four 
 coats will be needed as a rule. The pattern 
 may be polished by brisk but careful and oft- 
 repeated rubbing with a stick of soft wood. 
 Beeswax is often used for polishing, although 
 we think that the more artistic way is to 
 depend solely on the dull finish obtained by 
 means of oil alone. Even more than the use of 
 wax polish on carving do we deprecate that of 
 varnish of any kind, for it is a poor substitute 
 for the natural “ patina ” which comes from age 
 and wear, the process of which is arrested by a 
 covering of varnish. But for the benefit of 
 dissenters from this view we give the following 
 
Designs 98-104.—Edgings and Mouldings for Wood-Carving. 
 
42 
 
 THE CYCLOPEDIA OF HOME ARTS 
 
 directions for shellac finishing, by an expert 
 carver who finds it proper to use it. 
 
 Polishing.—“ To polish flat surfaces, such as 
 table-tops, the wood must be well rubbed with 
 No. o sandpaper, and all knot-holes and flaws 
 must be stopped with wax. The wood is then 
 filled with ‘ patent wood-filler,’ which is first 
 thinned down with turpentine to the con- 
 
 Design 105.—Mould for marking off the Design 
 
 SHOWN BELOW. 
 
 sistency of cream. Rub it in with a rag or a 
 little bunch of excelsior shavings. In a few 
 minutes the pores will be closed, and the surface 
 of the wood may be rubbed freely without 
 rubbing away any of the filler in them. 
 
 “ Put the wood aside until the next day ; 
 then give it a coat of shellac varnish, and put 
 the wood aside again for a few hours to harden. 
 When it is hard, rub it well with No. o 
 sandpaper until it is perfectly smooth. 
 
 “ The final polish is given with a ‘ rubber,’ 
 which consists of a small ball of cotton-batting 
 
 it on the mouth of the bottle, throwing the 
 solution toward it two or three times. In the 
 middle of the varnish on the rag, place with 
 with your finger a little raw linseed-oil. Rub 
 with small circular strokes until all the pores 
 are filled, charging the rubber with varnish and 
 oil when required, until the whole surface has 
 had one coat. When this is quite dry, repeat 
 the process until the surface appears even and 
 fine. Between each coat use the sandpaper to 
 smooth down all irregularities. Lastly, use a 
 clean rubber, with a little wood alcohol only, 
 which will remove the oil and the cloudings 
 it causes. Should the work become' sticky 
 and rough at any stage of the process, this can 
 be overcome by touching the surface here and 
 there with a little oil, which you should have 
 near you in a saucer, so that you may dip 
 a finger of the left hand into it, repeating 
 the process when needed. This is merely 
 to facilitate the spreading of the varnish 
 smoothly.” 
 
 Stamped Backgrounds.—As has been already 
 observed, stamping backgrounds, in our opinion, 
 gives too mechanical a look to wood-carving 
 in relief for it to be considered an artistic 
 finish ; but as some carvers are not of our way 
 of thinking, we must not ignore a process 
 which many amateurs find attractive and use 
 extensively. So, if you choose, having finished 
 your modelling, complete the work by stamping 
 the background. For any design of fair size, 
 use the largest stamp you have—the smaller 
 ones are for small spaces ; set the stamp, and 
 
 Design 105A.—Carved Gothic Dado Rail. Easy Lesson for a Beginner. 
 
 covered with a piece of soft linen rag, wrapped 
 so as to leave a handle at the back for the 
 hand. Partly saturate the rubber by placing 
 
 strike it lightly with the mallet. Keep turning 
 the stamp so that its square shape will not 
 show on the wood. The object of stamping is 
 
WOOD-CARVING 
 
 43 
 
 to get a fine-grained effect. When the grain 
 of the wood is broken it absorbs the oil more 
 readily, and makes a background darker than 
 the design. This, with the different texture it 
 gives the wood, throws the design into still 
 higher relief. Coarse stamping is more effective 
 than fine. 
 
 A Gothic Dado Rail. —One who has never 
 done actual cutting in wood and who has 
 doubt as to his ability to produce anything 
 creditable in this way, might, in many cases, 
 be induced to make a trial, were some specific 
 work of a simple character suggested to him 
 for a beginning, and which, if successful, could 
 be a noticeable feature in the decoration of his 
 home. Such an occasion for a first attempt 
 is easily found. In most houses there are one 
 or more rooms in which the walls, whether 
 painted or papered, are divided into dado and 
 frieze, the latter varying from twelve to thirty 
 inches in width, according to the height of the 
 room. Let this division line between the two 
 wall colours be emphasised into a line of 
 decoration. Instead of the usual painted band, 
 or machine-made moulding, let the division 
 be marked with a striking line of hand-carving. 
 It may be of cherry, black walnut, or oak, and 
 two and a half or three inches wide. The 
 finished result will be more satisfactory if the 
 wood is polished on the face and lower edge 
 before the carving is begun. The upper edge 
 of the strip should be rebated toward the 
 back, to afford a hold for hooks, from which 
 pictures might hang. These strips, which any 
 
 wall by means of eightpenny finishing nails, 
 driven into the studding through the lowered 
 portions of the carving; by doing this the 
 heads of the nails will not be seen. 
 
 Two rooms, in which a carved frieze-band 
 of cherry wood was introduced, are in the mind 
 of the present writer ; the added beauty secured 
 by this simple decoration won the approval of 
 
 Design ic6.—Mould for marking off the Design 
 
 SHOWN BELOW. 
 
 all who saw it. The designs consisted of easily 
 cut patterns of Gothic tracery, of which we 
 give illustrations. 
 
 To facilitate marking off a design for carving, 
 where a given form is many times repeated, it 
 is customary to make a mould of cardboard by 
 means of which the design is readily and 
 accurately transferred to the wood (designs 
 105 and 106). The design, after being drawn 
 on the card, is cut through with a sharp knife, 
 a gouge of the proper sweep, where possible, 
 being used to cut the curves. When the lines 
 
 Design io6a.—Carved Gothic Dado Rail. Easy Lesson for a Beginner. 
 
 carpenter could prepare, should be cut to the are cut through the card, they must be opened 
 proper lengths, to fit, before they are carved, and widened, so that a sharp-pointed pencil 
 When carved they should be secured to the will mark through the cut line to the wood. 
 
44 
 
 THE CYCLOPAEDIA OF HOME ARTS 
 
 This can be done by placing the mould upon 
 any smooth surface and pressing a dull point 
 or tracer through the line. If, before using, 
 the edges are painted with shellac varnish, the 
 mould will be strengthened, and probably last 
 double the time it would if this were not done. 
 Above each of the simple Gothic designs illus¬ 
 trated herewith is a diagram of the mould for 
 marking it off. The centres from which the 
 
 wood,—this, of course, will not avail if it is 
 unpolished. 
 
 In laying off this design, first make vertical 
 lines with a T square, three inches apart, 
 which will be the guide for placing the mould 
 in the exact position. A mould to mark 
 off a strip or border of a given width should 
 always be made with a doubled-over edge, of, 
 say, half an inch in width, to serve as a gauge 
 
 Design 107.—Wood-Carving. Watch Stand. 
 
 larger curves are struck are indicated, leaving 
 the quicker curves of the cusps to be drawn by 
 hand. The lines of the mould which are to be 
 cut through are indicated by an unbroken line ; 
 the dotted lines must not be cut, otherwise the 
 mould would drop into pieces, but are to be 
 put in by freehand drawing. If the wood is 
 polished, and the amateur doubts his ability 
 to draw these parallel lines with accuracy, the 
 dotted lines may be pricked through to the 
 
 or guide, and which, sliding along the edge 
 of the strip, secures uniformity in marking 
 the design. 
 
 Lower the portions within the dotted lines 
 a quarter of an inch, and stamp the back¬ 
 ground with a coarse stamp. The edges of 
 all bands in Gothic tracery are finished with 
 a hollow chamfer, as shown in the illustra¬ 
 tions, and indicated by the dotted line of the 
 moulds. 
 
WOOD-CARVING 
 
 45 
 
 Edges of Shelves admit of varied treatment. 
 Fig. 211 shows a square-edged shelf, with a 
 one-and-a-half-inch supporting rail. A lozenge 
 or square diamond, or a dog-tooth, is simple 
 and appropriate decoration for a square-edged 
 shelf. The rail admits of varied conventional 
 decoration, as in figs. 211 and 213. The edge 
 of the shelf should vary in form according to 
 the position it occupies ; that is, whether above 
 or below the eye. If the square edge is not 
 
 case the execution of the carving requires more 
 care, but the added effect is well worth the 
 extra trouble. 
 
 One of the most useful and inexpensive 
 articles of furniture—admitting, at the same 
 time, of fine and varied decoration—is a set of 
 hanging shelves, suitable for books, dining-room 
 service, or for bric-a-brac. It may be made in 
 the simplest manner, and it admits of almost 
 any degree of elaboration, both in construction 
 
 Figs. 211-214.—Edges of Shelves to be placed respectively Above and Below the Eye. 
 
 used, it should be moulded as in fig. 212 when 
 above the eye, and like fig. 214 when below the 
 eye. In every case the rail should be set back 
 at least a quarter of an inch from the face of 
 the shelf, and the edge of the shelf should be 
 recessed a like distance from the front edge of 
 the sides. The edges of shelves should not be 
 modelled, but carved with surface treatment 
 when in a position to catch the dust. 
 
 The supporting rails may be left with a square 
 face, as in figs. 211 and 213, or they may be 
 moulded, as in figs. 212 and 214. In the latter 
 
 and decoration. Black walnut, cherry, or oak 
 may be used. The carved parts should not 
 be stained, but simply brushed over with raw 
 linseed-oil. 
 
 There is a point in the construction of hanging 
 shelves which should not be overlooked : the 
 cabinet-maker should invariably be directed to 
 dovetail all the shelves into the sides. 
 
 The decoration of the sides should be selected 
 with reference to its general effect, and, while 
 appropriate and striking, should be subordinate 
 to the face decoration. 
 
Designs 108-116.—Bands of Decoration for Wood-Carving. To be Applied either Vertically 
 
 or Horizontally. 
 
Plate F.—Full-size Design for 
 Wood-Carving or Pyrogravure. 
 
Back of 
 Foldout 
 Not Imaged 
 
48 
 
 THE CYCLOPAEDIA OF HOME ARTS 
 
 Diaper designs are often used for the decora¬ 
 tion of such objects as cabinets and book¬ 
 shelves ; for the back panels of open shelves, 
 
 Designs 157-162. —Simple Bands of Decoration for 
 Wood-Carving. 
 
 the sides or ends of caskets, book-racks, and 
 other places of secondary importance, the more 
 
 prominent spaces and panels being reserved 
 for decoration of more character. The simplest 
 and most useful diaper 1 is formed from a square. 
 This may be used in an upright and in a 
 diagonal position, as in Nos. 163 to 172. A 
 diaper may be made with (No. 165) or without 
 (No. 164) an intervening band. When a diaper 
 design is carved without a band—a favourite 
 form with the old Gothic architects—a dis¬ 
 tinctly incised line should mark the division. 
 Where the diaper is one, or one-and-a-quarter 
 inches square, the incised line should not 
 exceed one-eighth of an inch ; if smaller the 
 width of the incision should be correspondingly 
 diminished. 
 
 Another variety of diaper is obtained by 
 doubling the band, in which case each rosette 
 has its own complete border, as shown in 
 Nos. 166 and 168. The band, whether single 
 or double, may be interlaced, wicker-work 
 fashion, as in No. 177. Among further varia¬ 
 tions shown in our illustrations are the alter¬ 
 nating of one rosette with another of quite 
 different form, alternating a rosette and leaf, 
 and alternating the front view of a flower with 
 its profile or side view (Nos. 165, 175). 
 
 Diaper work maybe made to include designs 
 other than those of uniform divisions, an 
 example of which is shown in design 163, where 
 the arc of a circle, springing from a base line, 
 then reversing and crossing with a succession 
 of the same arc, gives pointed arches, diminish¬ 
 ing in size and varying in shape toward the top. 
 
 A design of this order may be used with 
 excellent effect for the back panels of bric-a- 
 brac , or other open shelves where surface carving 
 only is required. 
 
 The combined designs, Nos. 165 and 167, of 
 course, are not intended to be used as they are 
 shown here. It is only intended to indicate, in 
 a restricted space, how great is the variety of 
 motives at command for this simple method of 
 ornamentation. 
 
 1 The term diaper is said to be a perversion of the 
 word Ypres, a town in Belgium, whence the method oi 
 applying, to a certain kind of fabric, designs made up 
 “ all over ” geometrical patterns was first introduced into 
 England, in the Middle Ages. 
 
WOOD-CARVING 
 
 VI. CARVING IN THE ROUND. 
 
 The wood for small articles should be close 
 grained and well seasoned, every possible pre¬ 
 caution being necessary to guard against 
 splintering, or warping through variation of 
 temperature or from moisture. Lancewood is 
 excellent for the purpose, being uniform in 
 grain, tough and elastic. It would be equally 
 good for the carved spoon (No. 187) and the one 
 decorated with fret-work (No. 188); about the 
 latter process we shall speak presently. 
 
 A piece of lancewood eight and a half inches 
 long, two inches wide, and two and a half 
 inches thick, if properly managed, will cut into 
 two spoons. It should be planed and smoothed 
 on both sides. 
 
 The front view of the bowl and the shape of 
 the handle should be traced on both sides of 
 the wood, so that there is a bowl at each 
 opposite end. The bowl is one inch deep, and 
 should be the first part of the work considered. 
 The wood, being flat on both sides, can be 
 securely held under the clamps. The making 
 of the bowl being the heaviest part of the work, 
 it is necessary that this part in particular should 
 be fastened down firmly. With a half-inch 
 curved gouge cut away the wood from right to 
 left and left to right, removing very little wood 
 at a time, until you have sunk the bowl to* the 
 desired depth. Then with a straight, wide, 
 curved gouge cut away the sides. Great care 
 must be taken not to splinter or split the wood. 
 Such a defect, however slight, will show when 
 you thin down the reverse side. A blemish in 
 the bowl will make it practically worthless, as 
 it is likely to split apart altogether. Clean out 
 the shape as smoothly as you can with any 
 tools that are handiest, care being taken to 
 keep the bottom uniform, avoiding hills and 
 holes. The final smoothing can be done with 
 a bent riffle file and glass-paper secured to the 
 end of a stick ; the scratches can be removed 
 with a cabinet-maker’s half-round moulding 
 scraper. 
 
 The bowls being finished, the spoons are 
 sawn apart. The block of wood should be 
 held by its middle in a vice. Saw half way 
 through ; turn it round and saw the other half. 
 
 5* 
 
 A good deal of the shaping of the outside of 
 the bowl may be done with the saw, care being 
 taken not to saw too close. The work must be 
 held by the handle, which should be left rather 
 thick. 
 
 With an eight-inch half-round rasp, the work 
 may be speedily shaped. Care must be taken 
 not to carry this operation too far ; as the 
 wood thins it will be found too severe. 
 
 The fret-sawn handle should be rasped down 
 to about three-sixteenths of an inch, or less, 
 according to the size of the spoon and con- 
 
 Design i8i.—Armchair, carved wholly by an 
 Amateur. 
 
 dition of the wood. The whole is now ready to 
 be glass-papered and scraped. The operation 
 of fret-sawing will be described presently (see 
 
Designs 182-185. —Vertical or Horizontal Bands of Decoration for Wood-Carving. 
 
WOOD-CARVING 
 
 53 
 
 p. 56) with particular reference to its application 
 to the decoration of small articles of furniture ; 
 but fret-work is frequently used in conjunction 
 
 To return to No. 188, the design 
 be drawn on the back of the handle, 
 the back, because while piercing th< 
 
 Design 1S6.—Wood-Carving. End of a Library Stooi.. 
 
 should now 
 We say on 
 : design the 
 
 with wood-carving, and for our present purpose bowl would not allow the work to lie flat on the 
 it would seem desirable to anticipate some part fret-work “horse”— i.e., apiece of wood cut out 
 of these directions. in the form of a boot-jack, with a screw to 
 
54 
 
 THE CYCLOPAEDIA OF HOME ARTS 
 
 fasten it to the table, the two prongs projecting 
 over the table. 
 
 The fret-work is done as follows :—The wood 
 to be worked is laid on the horse. To saw out 
 the design, holes must be drilled in the places 
 to be taken out of the interior; the saw is 
 loosened at the bottom, put through the hole 
 and refastened, and so on until all the pieces to 
 come out of the centre are fretted. The saw is 
 worked in a perpendicular manner, the right 
 hand grasping the handle underneath the horse 
 and worked up and down between the two 
 prongs. The left hand is laid on the work to 
 guide it, according to the lines to be sawn. 
 
 The shape of the handle should now be sawn 
 out. This was not done before, because it 
 would have weakened the wood and would 
 ha,ve made it less convenient to hold in the 
 vice. 
 
 The beading round the handle should next 
 be marked off, and shaped with a six-inch, 
 half-round, smooth file. The lines to part the 
 beading from the handle can be made with a 
 parting or V tool; likewise the laps of the 
 design. The whole should now be smoothed 
 with oo glass-paper, and polished. The 
 polish is given by rubbing (burnishing) with a 
 piece of ivory, bone or hard wood. Do not rub 
 too hard, or you will mark the work ; rub 
 lightly and continually—the more rubbing the 
 better the polish. 
 
 Should you require the handle of the spoon 
 curved, it can be done by steaming. Wrap a 
 piece of rag around the bowl to keep the 
 moisture from it. Steam only the handle. 
 Take a piece of board a little wider and longer 
 than the spoon ; nail a piece of lath crosswise 
 where the curve of the handle should come on 
 one piece of board ; nail on the other board a 
 piece where the end of the handle will come ; 
 place the spoon between the boards and clamp 
 together; then put the spoon in a warm place 
 to dry for about twenty-four hours or more, 
 according to the density of the wood. 
 
 An amusing form of carving in the round is 
 the decoration of the handle of a walking-stick 
 with some grotesque head. A good plan is, 
 first, to model the design in clay. 
 
 <a 
 
 m. 
 
 mmi 
 
 Design 187.— Wood-Carving “ in the Round.” 
 
I Vi 
 
56 
 
 THE CYCLOPAEDIA OF HOME ARTS 
 
 FRET-SAWING. 
 
 In the classification of topics in the present 
 volume fret-sawing comes in naturally between 
 Wood and Metal, it being common to both 
 materials. When applied. to the latter, how¬ 
 ever, it is called Saw Piercing, and that subject 
 will be duly considered under the head of 
 Metal Work. 
 
 Fret-sawing in wood is a pleasant craft 
 brought somewhat into disrepute through the 
 ignorance with which it has been misapplied. 
 In no kind of decoration is the distinction 
 between pictures and ornament more needful to 
 insist on than in this, and in none has it been 
 more ignorantly ignored. Naturally treated 
 human figures, birds, beasts, and fishes, and 
 even portraiture and landscape, have been 
 attempted in fret-cutting! We need hardly 
 say that the only suitable designs for the pur¬ 
 pose are such as are geometrical, or those in 
 which natural forms are treated as purely 
 conventional ornament. 
 
 Pret-cut panels inserted in ordinary joiners’ 
 work are, as a rule, more appropriate than 
 articles made up wholly of fretwork; too 
 much ornament defeats its own end, bewilder¬ 
 ing instead of pleasing. A few panels of good 
 design, a well-placed moulding, or a little 
 ornament emphasising the salient parts of an 
 object, decorate it far more satisfactorily than 
 would a medley of so-called ornament lavished 
 on it without discrimination. Full-sized designs 
 for fret-sawn panels are given herewith, and 
 diagrams suggesting how they and similar ones 
 may be applied to furniture. The ornaments 
 being well protected, the feature of strength 
 has been little regarded ; but if they are to be 
 executed in wood, it must be of the sort known 
 as three-ply. As anything placed upon the 
 shelf of a bracket must necessarily hide some 
 part of a carved or otherwise decorated back, 
 the ornament, as in fig. 218, is best restricted 
 to the top. 
 
 Fret-work is rarely pleasing when polished. 
 Walnut, oak, or other dark woods perhaps will 
 be most suitable for such objects as are illus¬ 
 trated herewith, unless some light, closely- 
 
 grained wood—like birch, for instance—be 
 selected and stained with transparent dye, such 
 as the grass-green much seen in modern cabinet 
 work. 
 
 All the tools 1 absolutely necessary for fret- 
 sawing are a fret-saw frame, some saws, and a 
 fine bradawl. In selecting your wood (walnut 
 is the best), take care that it is of an even 
 thickness and free from knots; for ordinary 
 brackets and small frames one-eighth of an 
 inch is thick enough ; if thinner wood be used, 
 extra care must be taken to see that it has no 
 cracks or imperfections. With strong gum fix 
 on your pattern carefully, with the grain of the 
 wood running lengthwise. When it is quite 
 dry begin by boring a hole in each of the white 
 spaces in the pattern. Practice alone will 
 teach you the best place to bore the holes 
 so as to reduce the amount of sawing to a 
 minimum. 
 
 Next, screw the end of the saw to which 
 the teeth point into the clutch nearest the 
 handle of your saw-frame, and carefully push 
 the saw through one of the holes in your piece 
 of wood. Then, pressing the handle of the 
 frame against your chest and the top against 
 the edge of the table, insert the loose end of the 
 saw into the top clutch, and screw tight. If 
 the saws are not stretched very tight they are 
 liable to break. Now place the wood flat on 
 the edge of the table, keeping it steady by 
 pressing the left hand firmly upon it, and with 
 the right hand saw carefully round the edge of 
 the black pattern. It is better to begin with 
 the inside space, and to leave the outside edge 
 till the last. After taking out one piece care¬ 
 fully loosen the top clutch and insert the saw 
 in the next hole, screwing up tight as before. 
 When the whole pattern is cut out lay it in 
 water with the paper side down, and the paper 
 will come off ; if this is carefully done it will be 
 fit to use a second time. 
 
 Let your fret-work dry in a press or under 
 some heavy books, to prevent it warping. 
 When it is quite dry polish or stain it. 
 
 1 In the periodical Design and Work will be found 
 advertisements of tools for all kinds of woodwork. 
 


F IG . 217.— Corner Cabinet. Fig. 218.— Bracket. Fig. 219.— “ Occasional” Table. 
 
 Examples of Insertion of Fret-sawn Work in Small Articles of Furniture. 
 
58 
 
 THE CYCLOPAEDIA OF HOME ARTS 
 
 PYROGRAVURE 
 
 (BURNT-WOOD ETCHING). 
 
 I. THE EVOLUTION OF “ POKER WORK.” 
 
 PYROGRAVURE (i.e. writing in fire), otherwise 
 known as pyrography or burnt-wood etching, 
 and also by the old-fashioned name “poker- 
 work,” perhaps might be de- 
 
 J Wffl scribed under the head of 
 Wj “Drawing.” It certainly is 
 Ml drawing — with the heated 
 m metal point on wood, leather, 
 
 i|| or glass, just as Etching and 
 Drypoint are drawing with 
 f ife the needle or the burin on 
 metal. Etching and Dry- 
 |l| pj| point are so classified in this 
 
 1 MW wa y * n P resen ^ v °i ume ; 
 
 Ipl Wf but we must not confound 
 
 Y r> '-Vr the merely graphic with the 
 decorative arts, and Pyro- 
 
 Chair decorated gravure is, properly speaking, 
 in Pyrogravure. Decoration. With the de¬ 
 velopment of its technical 
 resources, through the application of the plati¬ 
 num point, artists and critics are agreed in 
 placing it under the latter head, and so 
 regarding it as a picturesque means of artistic 
 expression. Hamerton enthusiastically speaks 
 of pyrogravure as “ a complete artist’s process, 
 full of technical qualities and satisfactions.” 
 
 As has been said, it is a form of the old- 
 fashioned “ poker work.” A small kitchen 
 poker originally was the tool actually used. 
 It was heated in an ordinary fire and then 
 applied to the wood to be decorated, generally 
 for outline work of broad design. Although, 
 naturally, somewhat rudimentary in execution, 
 the work in skilled hands was remarkably 
 effective, especially when the background was 
 sufficiently burnt away to show the design in 
 low relief. 
 
 The first improvement on the humble 
 domestic implement was a set of poker-like 
 points of different sizes, made especially for 
 this sort of work, but all retaining the family 
 likeness to the dear old kitchen emblem. 
 
 With the smallest of these very fine lines 
 could be made, and the iron could be heated in 
 a spirit-lamp or gas-stove—certainly a much 
 cleaner and handier method than that of resort 
 to the open fire. But the great drawback 
 remained, that the point could never be kept to 
 an even heat: from the moment of taking it 
 from the flame the process of cooling began, 
 and hence the greatest difficulty was experi¬ 
 enced in attempting to control the depth of 
 the shading; and to obtain a flat, even tone 
 required a great deal of practice, as well as 
 technical ability. Still, the tool ploughing its 
 way through the uneven fibre of the wood, and 
 meeting with more opposition than it does from 
 the platinum point, gives a rugged vigour and 
 picturesqueness of effect not often achieved 
 with the more modern implement. With the 
 rounded platinum point you are too apt to get 
 a certain uniform woolliness of line. Much of 
 the charm of the art lies in the wonderful 
 accidental quality of broken line work. If you 
 perfect your instrument too much you lose 
 this—unless, indeed, you have the touch of a 
 genius, for a genius can work with any kind of 
 a tool and work wonders. 
 
 Fig. 221. —Pyrogravure Decoration for a Tabouret 
 (see also p. 345). 
 
 Pyrogravure is rather slow work. It is more 
 allied to etching than to painting. The artist 
 goes over and over his work, as the etcher bites 
 
PYROGRAVURE 
 
 59 
 
 Design 169.—Wood-Carving or Pyrogravure. Picture Frame (Virginia Creeper), by Benn Pitman. 
 
Design 190.—For Pyrogravure. Suitable for the Top of a Box. 
 
PYROGRAVURE 
 
 61 
 
 and rebitcs his plate. He deepens a tone here 
 by reburning, or works it off with emery-cloth 
 or sandpaper and reburns it. That is a little 
 secret of technique which has not been told 
 before. 
 
 Any tendency toward modelling or high 
 relief should be repressed. Indeed, in all 
 surface decoration the best effects are obtained 
 by the use of flat tones in combination with 
 graceful lines. Especially in this art should 
 the accentuated line predominate, and finicky 
 attempts at realistic detail be avoided. 
 
 The rich quality of old carved ivory may be 
 given to a panel by burning the background 
 and keeping the figures light ; or, if you prefer, 
 you may reverse the process, leaving the 
 ground light. 
 
 II. TOOLS AND MATERIALS. 
 
 The platinum point is by far the most ex¬ 
 pensive item in the outfit of the pyrographer ; 
 for platinum ranks only second to gold in 
 costliness. No other metal has its peculiar 
 quality of absorbing the heat conveyed by the 
 hydrocarbon vapour obtained from benzoline. 
 The pattern attachments for set forms and 
 borders, being hollow, cost about half as much 
 as the solid points. The blunt point, which is 
 the most useful, somewhat resembles in shape 
 that of the ordinary poker. Fine lines can be 
 got by using it lightly on the edge ; for broad 
 lines or shading it should be held in a less 
 upright position, so that it may more quickly 
 cover a broad surface. 
 
 The finer point of conical shape, a useful 
 addition in any case, is almost indispensable 
 for small or intricate designs. It would, how¬ 
 ever, be tedious to employ it alone even for 
 such work, its special purpose being for fine, 
 clear outlines. For covering broadly very 
 large spaces, there is an attachment almost flat 
 at the end, and about twice as thick as the 
 ordinary tool. 
 
 The curved point is much liked, especially 
 for backgrounds. It can be made to do duty 
 for fine or broad work ; for in coarse shading 
 it can be applied to the wood on its rounded 
 
 side, while for even lines or dots the point only 
 is brought into play. A great advantage of 
 the curved point is that, on account of its shape, 
 the body of the tool is kept at a greater distance 
 from the wood than is possible with a straight 
 instrument, thereby considerably lessening the 
 
 Design 191.—Pyrogravure on Leather. Cigar Case., 
 The motive is the tobacco plant. 
 
 chances of unintentional scorching, which is 
 liable to spoil effects where sharp contrasts 
 and great clearness are a necessity. 
 
 The Pattern Points are to be had in great 
 variety. The oval, circular, diamond, star„ 
 
62 
 
 THE CYCLOPAEDIA OF HOME ARTS 
 
 heart, and trefoil are most used, and various 
 combinations can be made with them. 
 
 Wood.—The kind of wood to use depends 
 greatly upon the size and character of the 
 decoration. For the frieze of a room or a large 
 panel to go over a chimneypiece, soft wood 
 would be best, for it would allow of bold treat¬ 
 ment of lines. But if you were intending to 
 
 excellent when a very light ground and strong 
 contrast are required; it readily takes very 
 dark—almost black—markings, so that a full 
 range of shading is possible. Artists, like Mr. 
 Hamerton in England and Mr. Fosdick in the 
 United States, have recommended Lombardy 
 poplar, for the opposition it affords between 
 the line and the ground. It is rather difficult 
 
 Design 192.—Pyrogravure on Wood or Leather. Nautical Motive. 
 
 ornament a jewel-box hard wood would be 
 best, because it lends itself to the most delicate 
 work. 
 
 Under any circumstances let the wood be as 
 nearly white as possible, for it affords the 
 greatest range of tones and the strongest con¬ 
 trasts. It should be close-fibred and it should 
 be soft, in order to burn readily. Holly is 
 
 to get it in England, and American white wood 
 (which has a greenish-yellow tinge) is much 
 used instead. Pine, elm, sycamore, chestnut, 
 and lime are more or less suitable. Oak is best 
 for solid furniture and wainscot decoration. 
 
 Polishing.—For a finish, the wood is either 
 oiled or varnished. Artists will use no varnish 
 of any kind ; they are satisfied to rub pure 
 
PYROGRAVURE 
 
 63 
 
 linseed oil into the wood from time to time 
 until the requisite brightness is obtained. For 
 those who prefer varnish we give the following 
 directions : Apply it thickly and rub it down 
 with pumice stone; varnish again and rub it 
 down as before, and so on, repeating the opera- 
 
 aid an object decorated in pyrogravure may 
 be made a coloured bas-relief without hiding 
 the grain of the wood. 
 
 Gilding and Silvering may be applied by 
 means of gold or silver leaf with very rich 
 effect for backgrounds. Very skilful manipula- 
 
 Design 193.—Pyrogravure on Wood or Leather. Suitable for a Tray or Mat. 
 
 tion two or three times until the desired polish 
 is obtained. The varnish should be thick, and 
 each coat should be allowed to dry thoroughly 
 before the next is applied. 
 
 Dye Staining.—White wood may be stained 
 to almost any colour by means of the dyes 
 used in printing and dyeing textiles. By their 
 
 tion is necessary for this process, and it is best 
 to employ a professional gilder. Do not use 
 (so-called) gold or silver paint, for they will 
 certainly tarnish. 
 
 “ Lustra Colours,” or Bronze Powders, are 
 sometimes used by amateur decorators, to 
 enhance the effect of pyrogravure ; but we 
 
64 
 
 THE CYCLOPAEDIA OF HOME ARTS 
 
 think that no artist who respected his material 
 would spoil his work by any such meretricious 
 addition to it. 
 
 A Substitute for Staining. — Many of the effects 
 of pyrogravure can be obtained more easily by 
 a process commonly used by wood-inlayers for 
 shading. This is the subjection of the parts of 
 the wood to be scorched or burned to the 
 action of hot sand. The pattern or design 
 being traced on the panel or other object to be 
 decorated, the parts which are to remain 
 unaffected by the heat are painted over with 
 flatted oil paint or, for rough work, with plaster. 
 As soon as this has hardened, the sand may be 
 poured on. Different shades can be obtained 
 by heating it to any required degree, and also 
 by allowing it to stay longer in one place than 
 in another. Either a light or a dark outline 
 may be obtained with much greater ease than 
 by pyrogravure, and for graduated shadows the 
 process is much more suitable. 
 
 HI. application of the platinum 
 
 POINT. 
 
 There are two machines made specially for 
 burnt-wood etching, but they are essentially 
 the same in principle, which is the application 
 of the platinum point, continuously heated and 
 regulated by means of a little hand bellows. 
 The heat for both is supplied by means of a 
 highly inflammable liquid, which must scru¬ 
 pulously be kept away from the neighbourhood 
 of a lighted gas-jet so long as the bottle contain¬ 
 ing it is uncorked. The vapour from the bottle 
 could readily unite with the flame, and would 
 then probably cause a serious accident. Kept 
 well corked, the liquid is no more dangerous 
 than in an ordinary lamp. 
 
 Having, so to speak, trimmed your machine 
 by filling the glass bottle provided for the 
 purpose about half full, put the remainder of 
 the liquid away at once, well corked, on a cool 
 shelf. Now fit in the stopper, to which are 
 affixed the two flexible tubes, terminating at 
 one end with a hand bellows, at the other with 
 a contrivance suited for attachment to any of 
 the extra pattern points made for borders and 
 geometrical work, also for sizes not in common 
 
 use other than that supplied in the outfit. A 
 small spirit lamp, furnished with a wick, is 
 included in the outfit, for the purpose of heating 
 the point to begin with. For this, of course, only 
 alcohol is required. Be careful not to allow the 
 small screw in the handle attachment to touch 
 the flesh, because it will soon become so hot that 
 you would be forced to drop it. Indeed, this 
 remark applies to any part of the metal work. 
 
 Light the spirit lamp, placed on your right 
 hand, grasp the end bulb of the bellows in your 
 left hand, and commence to blow very gently 
 while holding the platinum point in the flame. 
 In less than a minute the point should be red 
 hot. Extinguish the lamp and set to work on 
 your prepared design, keeping the point red hot 
 by continually and steadily working the bellows. 
 
 If the instrument be allowed to cool beyond 
 a certain point, resort must again be had to the 
 spirit lamp, so as to start it again. At first, 
 from want of practice and, perchance, from 
 over-anxiety, there will be some little difficulty 
 experienced in keeping up a steady, even heat, 
 and still more in controlling it so as to suit 
 exactly the needs of the design in hand. This 
 difficulty will not be overcome until the action 
 of the left hand has become almost involuntary, 
 following mechanically the will of the worker 
 in controlling the point of the instrument as he 
 draws with it. Practise several kinds of strokes 
 on a piece of waste wood until you have 
 mastered the sensations, which are not unlike 
 those experienced by a novice in swimming 
 when he endeavours to put in practice the 
 theory of the contrary action of hands and feet 
 at the same time. 
 
 The point should be red hot even for making 
 a delicate outline. The whole art in execution 
 lies in the regulation of the pressure and in the 
 even sweep of the tool. Any hesitation or 
 added pressure will deepen or make broader 
 the line being followed. 
 
 IV. PYROGRAVURE ON LEATHER. 
 
 Leather is a delightful material for work with 
 the platinum point. You can etch on it with 
 much greater freedom and rapidity than upon 
 
Designs 194, 195-— Pyrogravure on Leather. Decoration for Napkin Rings, 
 
THE CYCLOPAEDIA OF HOME ARTS 
 
 wood The burnt line differs considerably bindings: “ Tints of various kinds may be 
 from that on the latter. While on wood it re- employed in many cases to complete the 
 sembles the sepia printing inks used for some scheme of decoration ; but even without the 
 
 Design 196. —Pyrogravure on Leather, Wood, or Glass. Also available for Carving, and China 
 
 Decoration. 
 
 etchings, on calf leather it appears more as if it use of colour, mere singeing produces grounds 
 were clearly cut out. Hamerton suggested the of the finest quality on which the lighter parts 
 application of pyrogravure to leather book- may be left in relief. For example, suppose 
 
PYROGRAVURE 
 
 67 
 
 the case of a wreath designed on leather, and burner, which is not a point, and as the leaves 
 intended to show light on a dark ground, would be left of the natural colour of the 
 The outlines would all first be burnt in, which leather we have already three most valuable 
 
 Design 197.—Pyrogravure on Leather, Wood, or Glass. 
 
 Decoration. 
 
 Also suitable for Carving, and China 
 
 can be done with extreme sharpness and elements—line, light spaces, and dark spaces, 
 definition ; then all the ground intended to be But there is much more than this, as the 
 dark would be more or less browned with the line may be used with considerable freedom, 
 

 68 
 
 THE CYCLOPAEDIA OF HOME ARTS 
 
 and of the most various depth and thickness, the stationers’ shops the small leather articles 
 while the shades admit of every variety of that may be ornamented by this means are 
 gradation.” numerous indeed. We will only mention port- 
 
 Design 198. —Pyrogravure on Leather, Wood, or Glass. Also suitable for Carving, and China 
 
 Decoration. 
 
 White kid, no less than the more ordinarily folio covers of all kinds, blotting cases, bill 
 used soft brown leather, lends itself admirably folders, boxes for jewels, gloves, and hand- 
 to decoration with the platinum point. At kerchiefs, belts, baggage labels, calendar cases, 
 
PYROGRAVURE 
 
 69 
 
 card cases, ticket cases, covers for travelling “ The trade must need designs for many 
 clocks, comb cases for the pocket, cigar and such articles. If you seek to supply them, bear 
 cigarette cases, eyeglass cases, match-box cases, in mind that simplicity is the great thing to be 
 
 blotting pads, cases for pocket-knives, music aimed at—the best effect that can be got with 
 rolls, postal-card cases, penwipers, photograph the smallest amount of work • remember that 
 frames, razor straps, and shawl straps. a design has to be reproduced by hand with 
 
70 
 
 THE CYCLOPAEDIA OF HOME ARTS 
 
 great rapidity in order to make it profitable 
 to the manufacturer. Nearly all amateurs so 
 overload their designs with detail that they 
 are quite unavailable for purposes of “the 
 trade.” 
 
 V. TREATMENT OF SOME DESIGNS. 
 
 The four designs (pp. 121, 122, 123, 137) which 
 take the hawthorn for their motive may be easily 
 carried out on American white wood or on 
 calf leather. They illustrate a variety of effects 
 obtainable in pyrogravure. In Design No. 244 
 flowers and foliage are brought into prominent 
 relief by means of a shaded background, the 
 forms depending merely on a clear outline. 
 This at first sight may appear simpler in 
 execution than Design No. 248, which shows 
 the forms shaded on a white ground ; but it is 
 not so, because any slight inequality in shading 
 the flowers would be little noticeable and much 
 less objectionable than inequalities in a flat 
 shaded background ; evenness of tone would be 
 of the greater consequence in proportion to the 
 size of the surface to be covered. Design 
 No. 243 is more elaborate : it introduces shading 
 in dots on the lighter portions of the foliage, 
 which gives a pleasing variety and nice breadth 
 of light and shade. Be careful to burn the 
 dots very lightly. 
 
 The fourth of the series (Design No. 245) 
 shows the flower forms entirely burned 
 away; they should not, however, be charred 
 till they are black, but burned to a rich 
 dark brown ; a broad point is best for this 
 purpose. 
 
 This set of designs, primarily intended for 
 book covers, may be applied to a variety of 
 purposes. No. 248 is well suited, just as it is, 
 for the under panel of either No. 243 or No. 245; 
 but if the two last named are to be combined, 
 it would be well to treat the flowers on both 
 sides of the cover after the same manner, 
 either in line shading or all dark. The latter is 
 the more striking. To join the two panels, 
 burn two small holes at the back and one in 
 the front of each panel; pass some narrow 
 ribbon through these, tie bows at the back, and 
 
 leave ends in the front to tie when the cover is 
 closed. 
 
 Another way is to glue a lining throughout 
 both panels, leaving the thickness of the book 
 to be covered at the back between the two. 
 By repeating one of the designs four times on 
 one piece of wood, and bringing them close 
 together, utilising the dotted border around 
 No. 245 in doing so, a charming blotting-book 
 cover could be made. The design for the back 
 might be made up of the corners of No. 248, 
 with the addition of a large monogram for the 
 centre. 
 
 VI. PYROGRAVURE IN INTERIOR 
 DECORATION. 
 
 Not only furniture, mantels, and the like 
 may be acceptably decorated by pyrogravure ; 
 sometimes a room is so decorated throughout— 
 ceiling, walls, doors, and even flooring being 
 carried out in harmonious designs. Such 
 decoration one would hardly think would wear 
 well for a floor much in use; but it might take 
 the place of a parquetry border around a room, 
 with a rug thrown down extending to within 
 two or three feet of the walls. 
 
 A wainscoted and open-ceiled hall, or dining¬ 
 room, or library, of Gothic or early Renaissance 
 design, would offer the best field for such an 
 attempt, and oak would be the most favourable 
 wood. If combined with other modes of 
 decoration, the effect need not be at all 
 sombre. 
 
 The architectural mouldings should be left 
 plain, and the decoration should be confined to 
 the panels of wall and doors and the beams 
 and panels of the ceiling. For the beams we 
 would recommend a bold running vine pattern, 
 forming openings to be occupied by medallions. 
 The vine should be outlined deeply, so that it 
 will form an incised relief; and the highest 
 parts may be brought out with a little rough 
 gilding. The openings may be filled with 
 shields painted in bright colours, or with con¬ 
 ventional rosettes. But the treatment of the 
 beams should be decidedly bolder and less 
 elaborate than that of the panels Detween, 
 
72 
 
 THE CYCLOPAEDIA OF HOME ARTS 
 
 which require to be filled with a more delicately 
 
 traced design, and to be helped out by a more 
 liberal application of painting and gilding. As 
 
 a rule, blue makes the most effective ground 
 colour, and festoons of fruit, or strap and 
 ribbon-work in the Renaissance manner, on 
 either side of a central medallion, will be 
 found effective in most instances. The fruits, 
 flowers, and borders may be touched with 
 colour, as well as gilding, but the colours 
 are best applied after the panels are in place, 
 and it is possible to judge of their effect. 
 Such designs as are commonly used in 
 stamped leather work, lincrusta, anaglypta, 
 and stamped wall papers may often be adapted 
 to use in such a ceiling as we are describing ; 
 but the adapter should merely select from 
 them such details as can be rearranged with 
 reference to the dimensions of his panels 
 and the general architectural scheme of the 
 room. Ordinarily, it is well to make the 
 design symmetrical, with a very marked and 
 important centre. 
 
 The panelling of walls, doors, and mantel 
 calls for yet more careful treatment, and if 
 judiciously introduced, light-coloured woods, 
 such as maple, or, in very small panels, box¬ 
 wood may have an excellent effect. In this 
 latter case, the various methods of scorching 
 and staining the wood come into play. Sole 
 leather, also, gives very good and somewhat 
 peculiar results. As it burns to a sharp 
 edge, the line produced may be very clean 
 and precise, while even the fine-grained 
 woods give always a broken line. Leather 
 has the further advantage that the back¬ 
 ground may be enriched by stamping with 
 small hand stamps. It may be painted upon 
 with opaque oil paints used thickly, without 
 any preparation ; or it may be silvered and 
 then painted over the silvering with trans¬ 
 parent colours. 
 
 It is waste of labour to attempt to give their 
 general form to objects by means of pyro- 
 gravure. All architectural embellishments, such 
 as columns, mouldings, carvings in high relief 
 and the shaping of chair-backs and othei 
 furniture should be produced in the usual 
 manner. The province of the pyrographer is 
 to decorate the surfaces left by carpenter and 
 carver. If properly executed, his work blends 
 
PYROGRAVURE 
 
 73 
 
 well with both carved and painted work, and 
 forms an intermediate sort of decoration, which 
 should tend to produce a harmonious general 
 
 used so as to obtain varying depths and widths 
 of line. How pyrogravure may be applied 
 pictorially in decoration is illustrated by our 
 
 Design 202.—Panel Decoration. Pyrogravure and Painted Leather. 
 
 effect. In the case of oak furniture the acid 
 stain may be used to give colour to the ground, 
 saving out the masses of the design, which 
 should be carefully outlined, several tools being 
 
 reproduction of part of a frieze (p. 71 ) which 
 Mr. J. William Fosdick designed and exe¬ 
 cuted for an American millionaire’s dining¬ 
 room. 
 
THE CYCLOPAEDIA OF HOME ARTS 
 
 Designs 203-207.—Pyrogravure and Painted Leather Decorations. 
 
PYROGRAVURE 
 
 75 
 
 VII. GLASS PYROGRAVURE. 
 
 The platinum point to be used on glass must 
 be made many degrees hotter than for wood or 
 leather. It is not enough that it shall frequently 
 be held in the flame to make it red hot. It 
 must be constantly kept at almost white heat: 
 a special point, supplied with an inner appliance 
 
 be well distributed over the glass, or it may 
 crack it. 
 
 Glass Pyrogravure is especially suitable for 
 the decoration of mirrors, fire-screens, and 
 photograph-frames. Ordinary plate-glass is 
 used, but it must be of the hardest kind. 
 Except on looking-glass, there is no necessity 
 
 for generating and retaining heat, is sold for the 
 purpose. 
 
 The ordinary point heated to almost white 
 heat might be used; but the process would be 
 tedious and the point would soon get too much 
 damaged for further service. The pressure 
 must be steady but not hard, and the heat must 
 
 to trace the design, for it has only to be put 
 under the glass itself and worked over like the 
 ground-glass of a child’s drawing-slate. 
 
 The effect is similar to that of etching on 
 glass with acid ; but, happily, it can be done 
 without the danger of inhaling the noxious 
 fumes of hydrofluoric acid, to say nothing of 
 
76 
 
 THE CYCLOPAEDIA OF HOME ARTS 
 
 the risk of contact of the flesh with such a 
 dangerous fluid. 
 
 Sometimes the lines of glass pyrogravure are 
 
 Design 209.—Pyrogravure Decoration for Cigar 
 Case. 
 
 filled in with gold paint, which show effectively 
 from the other side. With a pad of soft cloth 
 dampened with turpentine, the superfluous 
 
 paint is wiped from the glass, which, being quite 
 clean, is then covered entirely with a thick coat 
 of white enamel paint, rendering the glass 
 opaque, and giving the effect, from the back, of 
 
 Designs 210, 211.—Pyrogravure and Painted 
 Leather Decorations. 
 
 polished ivory with incised gold tracery. In 
 laying the paint, care must be taken not to 
 drag up the gold from the lines. 
 
LEATHER AND LINCRUSTA DECORATION 
 
 LEATHER AND LINCRUSTA 
 DECORATION. 
 
 I. STAMPING, GILDING, PAINTING. 
 
 What is usually called “stamped leather,” 
 made and sold by the roll, it would be more 
 proper to term “ embossed leather, for the 
 design in relief is obtained by pressure be¬ 
 tween rollers, one bearing the design in relief 
 and the other its concave counterpart The 
 manufacturers, however, occasionally produce 
 a little work on the principle of old Venetian 
 stamped leather, the stamping of which was 
 done by hand, with small stamps like book¬ 
 binders’ stamps. This is a sort of work 
 which may easily be done by amateurs, and 
 which may be developed into a home industry 
 of some importance. 
 
 Sole leather is the only sort to use. The 
 thin leather used for embossing will not do 
 for stamping. If only a panel is to be made 
 a single piece may, perhaps, be found large 
 enough to answer; but if a considerable surface 
 is to be covered several pieces will be required. 
 The edges should be neatly cut, so that the 
 several pieces may meet exactly when in place. 
 They can be fastened to the wall with very 
 strong glue and with brass-headed nails. The 
 slight interruption of the design by the latter, 
 and by the joining of the several pieces, does 
 not count if the design is large and bold, as it 
 ought to be. The leather may be wrought 
 on plain if its natural colour is considered 
 sufficient, but much richer effects can be had by 
 first coating it with silver or tin or aluminium 
 leaf. This purely mechanical work should 
 be done by a competent gilder. It is well 
 to know, however, the manner of procedure, 
 and the amateur if he chooses can try the 
 work himself. 
 
 To Gild Leather dampen the skin with a 
 sponge and water, and strain it tight with 
 tacks on a board sufficiently large. When it 
 is quite dry, size it with clear double size; 
 then beat the whites of eggs with a wisp to 
 a foam, and let them stand to settle. Next 
 take books of leaf silver and blow out the 
 leaves on a gilder’s cushion, pass over the 
 
 77 
 
 leather carefully with the egg size, and with 
 a tip brush lay on the silver, closing any 
 blister that may be left with a wad of cotton. 
 When this is dry, varnish over the silvered 
 surface with yellow lacquer until it becomes 
 a fine gold colour. The gilded skin is then 
 cut into strips of the desired sizes. 
 
 Another Way is that used by the bookbinder. 
 He first goes over the part to be gilded with 
 a sponge dipped in white of eggs that has 
 been beaten up to a froth and then allowed 
 to settle; then, being provided with a brass 
 roller, on the edge of which the desired pattern 
 is engraved, and fixed as a wheel in a handle, 
 he heats it before the fire until the surface 
 will just hiss if touched with the wetted finger. 
 While the roller is heating he rubs with an 
 oiled rag the parts of the leather which are 
 to receive the pattern, and strips of gold leaf, 
 which he presses down with a wad of cotton. 
 He then runs the roller along the edge of 
 the leather and wipes off the superfluous gold 
 with an oiled rag. The gold only adheres 
 where the roller has left its impression. 
 
 Tools and Appliances.—The next requisites, 
 after the silvered leather, is a stamping-block 
 of some middling hard wood and a supply 
 of bookbinders’ stamps. These are small 
 stamps engraved in brass and having long 
 shanks which are secured in wooden handles. 
 Their variety may be judged of from an 
 examination of bound books in any book shop. 
 Those that are best for the present purpose 
 are the simpler sorts. To secure variety of 
 effect it is necessary that some should be very 
 “open”—that is, should have their design 
 in outline, while others should have consider¬ 
 able surface. It is also necessary to have 
 some varnishes and oil colours, a list of which 
 will be given farther on, a few large camel- 
 hair brushes and small sables, and a tracing 
 point of ivory, bone or agate. 
 
 The design, having been prepared or copied 
 on thin but tough paper, is laid over the 
 silvered leather and traced with a strong pres¬ 
 sure by the point so as to leave a good mark 
 on the leather. If thought desirable, this can 
 be gone over with a fine sable brush and brown 
 
THE CYCLOPAEDIA OF HOME ARTS 
 
 7$ 
 
 varnish, but it is better to be careful and 
 depend on the indented line left by the tracer. 
 
 The tools are now selected—different tools 
 for the background and for the different parts 
 of the design. Some parts, as flowers and 
 foliage that are to appear in their natural 
 colours, are left plain. As a rule, the back¬ 
 ground tooling should be the heaviest, and 
 should be done with tools having a good deal 
 of surface. The tools should be warmed 
 moderately in the flame of a spirit lamp, and 
 should be applied with a quick pressure of 
 the wrist and arm. The work should be 
 carried as nearly as possible up to the outline, 
 the tools never being changed in the same 
 part of the design. 
 
 The tooling will give the effect of a richly 
 diapered surface, but the pattern will still be 
 rather difficult to make out. The next thing 
 is the treatment of the background. This may 
 be left in silver, may be covered down with 
 two or three coats of gold varnish, or may be 
 gold varnished in parts, when these are entirely 
 enclosed and shut off from other parts of the 
 background by the lines of the design. This 
 last plan gives a varied background of silver 
 and gold, and is the most effective. Still, good 
 old examples may be found in which the 
 background is treated in opaque oil colour, 
 commonly turquoise or other blue, the metallic 
 effects being reserved for parts of the design. 
 Besides the gold varnish there is also a carmine 
 or ruby varnish which may be largely used if a 
 red tone is desired. A varnish which may be 
 made of a little powdered aloes, which can be 
 bought at any chemist’s shop, dissolved in 
 alcohol, gives a warmer gold tone when used 
 thinly than the gold varnish of the colourmen, 
 and, when several coatings are given, a rich 
 reddish brown. It serves admirably to tone 
 the carmine varnish, which is of rather too 
 bright a red. Mixed with blue it gives an 
 excellent olive green. These will be all the 
 transparent tints that will be required. The 
 large camel-hair brushes are used in apply¬ 
 ing the varnish, which should be made to flow 
 evenly and smoothly. 
 
 The background finished, the purely con¬ 
 
 ventional parts of the design are best treated 
 in varnish of a contrasting colour ; or, if the | 
 background is treated in opaque colour, these ' 
 can be left in gold or silver. 
 
 The oil colours, used preferably in the 
 naturalistic parts of the design, should be 
 mixed with varnishes of the same colour, and 
 be applied with sable brushes. Rather dark 
 olives are most used for leaves, as they contrast 
 well with the bright metallic ground. White, 
 Dark Blue, Vermilion and Turquoise are the 
 other colours most used in good old work. 
 They all go well with gold and the transparent 
 tones. The following would be a safe palette 
 for the beginner :— 
 
 Varnishes: Gold ; Carmine toned with aloes ; 
 Olive, made by mixing aloes and deep blue 
 varnish ; and aloes used alone. 
 
 Oil Colours: Turquoise made by mixing 
 Cobalt with Emerald Green ; Cobalt darkened 
 with Black ; White, and Vermilion. Extreme 
 richness rather than brilliancy of effect should : 
 be aimed at. 
 
 The painting completed, the outline should 
 be gone over last of all with a very strong j 
 solution of aloes and a fine sable brush. All 
 small details—such as the veining of leaves— 1 
 can be put in at the same time. 
 
 An appearance of age and a certain iridescent 
 quality can be given the silver before working 
 upon it by submitting it to the fumes of j 
 sulphuretted hydrogen ; but it need not be 
 said that it is an unpleasant operation. Some 
 people find the smell of aloes unbearable, and ; 
 in that case they may be replaced, but not to 
 advantage in any other respect, by the brown 
 varnish of the colourmen. When the work is 
 done the smell is imperceptible. 
 
 II. BOILED LEATHER WORK. 
 
 We have given some instructions as to the 
 stamping of leather with small hand stamps in 
 the old Venetian fashion as a preparation for 
 illuminating or painting. Much bolder and 
 more effective work may be attempted with 
 even greater ease if the leather is first boiled, 
 or merely macerated in cold water until soft 
 
t 
 
 Plate H.—Full-size Design for “ Cuir Bouille ” (Boiled Leather Work). 
 
 PANEL DECORATION FOR THE BACK OF A CHAIR. Designed by L. W. Miller 
 
LEATHER DECORATION 
 
 79 
 
 enough. If alum or soft soap be boiled with 
 the leather, the latter as it dries becomes quite 
 hard and remains so. This is of importance 
 in the preparation of small articles, such as 
 caskets and cases, which require a certain 
 degree of stiffness in their materials. For 
 work of this nature the plan commonly followed 
 is that recommended by Mr. Charles G. Leland 
 in his excellent little book on the “ Minor Arts ” 
 (Macmillan & Co.), which is to boil thin or 
 “kip” leather in alum water, apply it with 
 strong glue on a mould first carefully made 
 of papier-mache, and work it into the intricacies 
 of the mould and finish the details with leather 
 worker’s tools. This plan may be easy, but it 
 is certainly tedious and more suited to the 
 mechanic than to the artist, besides which the 
 articles so made can hardly be of a substantial 
 quality. A better plan is to discard papier- 
 mach£ and scrap leather and choose a skin 
 heavy enough for the purpose. The model for 
 this, if the work is to be in all respects original, 
 will first be carved out in hard wood, mahogany 
 offering the best grain. It is to be carved in 
 intaglio—that is, the parts that are to be raised 
 in the leather must be cut away in the wood, 
 and the hollows must be carefully rounded and 
 smoothed with sandpaper. If the work under¬ 
 taken is a large one, such as the panelling of 
 the walls or ceiling of a room, this wooden 
 mould will not answer. It must, in such case, 
 be taken to a foundry and reproduced, both in 
 relief and in intaglio, in iron ; and if the use of 
 a press can be had, the relief had better be 
 formed into a roller. But for the work usually 
 attempted by amateurs, which will not go 
 beyond a few copies of a panel, say of three or 
 four square feet, the mahogany mould will do. 
 The design may be drawn or traced upon the 
 wood, which may be easily whitened with a 
 wash of Chinese White. Round and V-shaped 
 gouges and chisels of various sizes are used in 
 the cutting, and may be bought of any dealer 
 in wood-worker’s tools. The sandpapering is 
 an important part of this preliminary work, as 
 any roughness may quite spoil the result. 
 
 The leather being boiled until quite soft, 
 which takes but an hour or so, is pressed 
 
 quickly into all parts of the mould with a wad 
 of newspaper; then more carefully, part by 
 part, beginning at the centre, with the fingers ; 
 finally with wood or bone implements shaped 
 like burnishing tools (the handle of a tooth- 
 
 Fig. 222.— Sheath in Fig. 223.—Box in “Cuir 
 “Cuir Bouilli.” Bouilli.” 
 
 Italian work of the sixteenth century. 
 
 brush may answer for one, and a set of 
 sculptor’s wooden tools may be all that will be 
 found necessary) it is pressed forcibly into every 
 trait of the design. While the work is going 
 on the leather will be drying and hardening and 
 drawing toward the centre ; but it may be kept 
 
8o 
 
 THE CYCLOPAEDIA OF HOME ARTS 
 
 moist and soft as long as required by a sponge 
 dipped in warm water. 
 
 It will be readily understood that, on being 
 lifted out of its wooden mould, the leather 
 panel will present the design in relief, but 
 without sharpness or precision. This, how¬ 
 ever, is but a beginning. Before allowing it to 
 dry thoroughly and harden much may be done 
 by filling in the flat spaces by means of small 
 
 Gothic work, and give it much of its peculiar 
 character. 
 
 It is in the making of small objects that Mr. 
 Leland advises the making of a papier-mache 
 or scrap leather and dextrine mould, which is 
 to remain as a backing within a slight covering 
 of moulded leather. But it is better that this 
 last should be heavy enough to stand alone. 
 The mould for such an object may be prepared 
 
 Fig. 224.—Leather Decoration. Bible Case of “Cuir Bouilli” (Boiled Leather). 
 
 Italian work of the end of the fifteenth century. (Formerly in the Spitzer Collection.) 
 
 stamps, as already recommended in treating 
 unboiled leather work. Bookbinders’ stamps 
 are the best, and may be had cheaply in great 
 variety. Small punches are sometimes used 
 to produce a hammered appearance, chisels 
 and roulette wheels for lines, and when very 
 thick leather is used lines may be incised with 
 a sharp penknife or with a narrow wood- 
 engraver’s gouge. These incised lines, cut 
 with the knife, are very common in good 
 
 in a variety of ways; but the best is to make 
 a wooden core, blocking out, as it were, the 
 general form of the object. The ornament 
 may be carved on this, in relief if it is to be 
 in relief on the finished object, or it may be 
 moulded on it with powdered leather mixed with 
 dextrine, or with plaster-of-Paris mixed with 
 gum-arabic and alum, either of which prepara¬ 
 tions will become hard when dry. The soft 
 leather is pressed around this core, and the 
 
LEATHER DECORATION 
 
 ornament is finished by tooling, as has just 
 been described. When finished a sharp knife 
 is run through three sides, if necessary, of the 
 object, and the core removed. The edges are 
 joined, preferably by stitching, while still moist 
 —a job which can be done by any cobbler. 
 The articles can be blackened with black ink 
 or browned with bichromate of potash mixed 
 with water. This last stain renders it water¬ 
 proof after exposure to the sunlight, but it is 
 poisonous. 
 
 Painting, silvering, gilding, and illuminating 
 can be done on boiled leather as well as on 
 ordinary leather; but there are other modes 
 of ornamentation which we have not before 
 treated of. One of these is to press into the 
 soft leather stamps cut out of sheet brass or 
 other metal. The leather will swell out in the 
 interstices, and when the stamps are removed 
 will show the patterns in relief. If the stamps 
 are heated before applying them to the leather 
 the impression which they make will be 
 coloured dark brown, adding to the effect¬ 
 iveness of the ornamentation. The stamps 
 themselves may be left imbedded in the leather, 
 and may be fastened by small rivets. Ivory, 
 wood, and other substances may be imbedded 
 in the same way, making a very effective 
 though rude sort of encrusted work. Finally, 
 the soft leather may be moulded freely by 
 hand, just as wax or clay may be moulded, 
 and the flat parts may be covered or partly 
 covered with a mosaic of scraps of various 
 coloured morocco, as in artistic bookbinding. 
 Vellum or parchment panels boiled and 
 moulded as above look very much like rude 
 ivory carvings. 
 
 III. BOOKBINDINGS. 
 
 The principal modes of decorating leather 
 bindings are but two in number—by gilt 
 tooling and by mosaics of coloured leathers. 
 The availability of pyrogravure for the pur¬ 
 pose of decorating bindings has already been 
 noted (p. 66). Designs for “ cloth ” (really 
 coarse muslin or linen is used) are by far the 
 most in demand by publishers, and we shall 
 
 presently give some practical hints for pre¬ 
 paring them. 
 
 The Mosaic Mode is but little practised, and as 
 it has had no appreciable effect on cloth bind¬ 
 ings or cases, we will not give it much con¬ 
 sideration. The work should be a true mosaic, 
 but often it is only a “ pastiche,” the ornaments 
 being cut out of very thin leather and pasted or 
 glued on the leather of the ground. When 
 they are bordered by lines impressed and gilt, 
 as is usually the case, it may be difficult to 
 detect the fraud. In any case, very large or 
 very elaborate incrustations are to be avoided. 
 The colour of the ground should cover most of 
 the space, and other colours should appear only 
 in small panels, or in flowers or other isolated 
 ornaments. Yet we often see long bands, often 
 interlaced, inserted, though if one of these 
 become detached at a corner, the entire decora¬ 
 tion is in danger. Flowers and other naturalistic 
 designs should also be avoided, because they 
 present too many angles where the leather may 
 easily be lifted from the board. 
 
 The designer called upon to produce a design 
 for a mosaic binding should confine himself as 
 much as possible to geometrical forms, which 
 he should dispose as panels, letting the leather 
 which really forms the cover appear between 
 and about them in broad and solid bands. He 
 may rely on a finer ornamentation in gilt tool¬ 
 ing to preserve his design from any appearance 
 of heaviness. Flowers and other emblems need 
 not be entirely discarded, but they should be 
 strictly conventionalised and reduced as much 
 as possible to square or circular forms. The 
 effect of these bindings has sometimes been 
 imitated by painting ; but it is a means that we 
 cannot commend. 
 
 Tooling.—Of all means employed in the 
 decoration of bindings, gilt tooling is un¬ 
 doubtedly the chief. The design, which must 
 be very carefully drawn, is printed on thin, 
 paper with the tools that are actually to be used 
 blackened in the flame of a candle. The 
 design may be such that special tools may have 
 to be used for it; but this, of course, increases 
 the cost, and the designer should therefore keep 
 as much as possible to the forms commonly 
 
 6 
 
Design 212.—Mosaic Leather Work for Bookbinding. Also suitable for Pyrogravure on Wood, 
 
 Leather, or Glass. 
 
LEATHER DECORATION 
 
 83 
 
 Design 214.—Mosaic Leather Work. Also suitable for Pyrogravure. 
 
8 4 
 
 THE CYCLOPAEDIA OF HOME ARTS 
 
 used. These are straight lines (called fillets), 
 curves (called gouges), small circles, stars, 
 dots, spirals, leaves and flowers. Innumerable 
 patterns may be made with these simple 
 elements, and the best plan will be for the 
 designer to buy himself a set of the most usual 
 forms only, and work out his patterns with them. 
 Should the binder to whom the design is com¬ 
 mitted not have the same forms, he will be 
 sure to have others nearly alike, and it makes 
 little difference in the general appearance of a 
 design whether a small leaf or flower be a little 
 different from that in the drawing or not. 
 Small tools only must be used, for it is im¬ 
 portant that the gilder should see all around it, 
 in order to be sure that he is pressing it evenly 
 into the leather. It is hardly necessary to add 
 that these tools are appropriate for many other 
 articles made of leather, as well as for book¬ 
 bindings. They may be got through any large 
 hardware house. 
 
 The design, worked out on the paper, is 
 pasted at the corners only on the cover that it 
 is intended to decorate, and the same tools are 
 again applied, each in its place, to impress the 
 design through the paper into the leather. In 
 what is called blind tooling, that is, without 
 gilding, this impression is merely deepened and 
 darkened by another application of the tools 
 previously heated. But if the design is to be 
 gilt, white of egg is applied as carefully as 
 possible with the point of a fine sable brush : 
 two coatings are considered necessary ; upon 
 this the gold leaf is laid, and is forced into the 
 original impression with the heated tools. It 
 is generally necessary to apply a second 
 gilding, at least in parts. If the tools are not 
 applied exactly in the marks first made, or if 
 the pencilling with white of egg be not very 
 carefully done, a blurred or heavy impression 
 will result. The finishers of the present day 
 (as the gilders are called) are as skilful as the 
 forwarders (those who shape the book and 
 cover it with leather) are careless or awkward, 
 and the amateur who competes with the regular 
 shops in gilding will have no easy task. We 
 advise him to content himself with making the 
 design in the manner above described. 
 
 There are many well-known historical styles ; 
 but practically, the forms of design applic¬ 
 able to a binding may be reduced to a few. 
 The boards or sides of the cover may be 
 decorated with a border only, sometimes, but 
 improperly, executed with an engraved roll ; 
 they may have corner pieces or centre panel 
 only; they may have a diaper all over of 
 the fleur-de-lis, the rose, or other 
 emblem ; or the entire space may 
 be divided up into ornamental 
 panelling, and the compartments 
 filled or not with small scrolls, 
 branches, and the like. This last, 
 the richest and most artistic mode 
 of design, is one of the oldest. 
 In its plainer forms, of panels 
 made by interlacing bands or 
 fillets, it is known as the Grolier 
 style, after a celebrated book-lover 
 and collector of the fifteenth cen¬ 
 tury. In some respects, no more 
 beautiful bindings have ever been 
 made. Straight lines predominate 
 in them, or are cleverly combined 
 with curves to form the outlines 
 of the compartments, which are 
 generally left plain except for a 
 little lettering. Very soon, how¬ 
 ever, the compartments were filled 
 in, at first with bold scroll-work 
 and conventional leaves, all worked 
 with the curved tools called 
 gouges, with the occasional aid of 
 tools copied from the printers’ 
 ornaments then in use. Later, 
 very rich designs of branches with 
 small and large spirals, leaves, and 
 flowers were used, and these, in 
 turn, were supplanted by the finest filigree 
 work in the seventeenth century bindings 
 attributed to Le Gascon. Little or no pro¬ 
 gress has been made in designing for tooled 
 bindings since this time ; but the technique 
 has been perfected to the utmost. 
 
 The design given on p. 82 is a fair example 
 of the more elaborate modern adaptations of 
 the old Grolier bindings. 
 
 Design 215. 
 “ Tooling ” 
 
 FROM AN OLD 
 
 Binding. 
 
LINCRUSTA DECORATION 
 
 85 
 
 LINCRUSTA, OR ANAGLYPTA 
 DECORATION. 
 
 Lincrusta, or its competitor Anagylpta, lends 
 itself 1 eadily to surface decoration in the manner 
 of leather. Ordinary oil colours may be applied 
 as easily as to leather or wood. But it is to 
 the former that these two patented materials 
 are most akin, although we have not heard of 
 any one who has tried the boiling or macerating 
 experiment with them. Gold and silver leaf 
 adhere to them as they do to leather, and these 
 in turn may be tinted to any shade by thin 
 washes of transparent coloured glazing var¬ 
 nishes. Capital effects can be obtained by 
 giving to the material some delicate shade or 
 gradation of shades in oil colours, and, when 
 dry, drawing a flat brush, charged with gold or 
 other bronze powder, rapidly and lightly back¬ 
 ward and forward over this tinted surface. 
 The raised rib or grain catches minute particles 
 of the metal in powder, with the effect of colour 
 seen through a film of gold. The brush should 
 be held horizontally, and only as much bronzing 
 liquid should be added to the gold as will 
 enable it to leave the brush easily. A thin 
 coat of white shellac varnish subdues the 
 brilliancy of these effects, but adds to their 
 permanency. 
 
 For oxidised silver, cover in silver leaf, or, if 
 preferred, in one or both silver bronzes. Glaze 
 the silvered surface with white shellac varnish ; 
 when this is dry rub a brush well charged with 
 dark blue-gray oil colour into all interstices of 
 the ornament in relief, as well as upon the 
 background, leaving the colour thickest upon 
 those portions of background more immediately 
 surrounding the raised ornament; now remove 
 the colour from the highest points by rubbing 
 with a soft cloth tightly folded, and pass a 
 clean brush over those parts in lower relief that 
 require to be left in half-tone. Duller yet more 
 artistic effects are produced by using “ dry 
 colour ” in powder for the deepest shades. It is 
 of importance that these colours lie thickest on 
 those parts of the design thrown most into 
 shade, and, as in natural oxidation, the surface 
 forming the background should have fewer and 
 more subdued lights than the more prominent 
 
 parts of raised ornament. A careful study of 
 some piece of silver oxidised by nature will 
 help the reader more than many words ; and 
 every little grace of burnished light and 
 softened shadow, noted on the true chasing 
 and transferred to the work in hand, will give 
 to it further beauty. 
 
 For a fairly permanent bright green bronze, 
 paint over a first coating of brown dryer, a 
 second of copper bronze in powder, mixed 
 with bronzing liquid ; dry thoroughly. Over 
 this draw a brush loaded with green bronze 
 powder, also mixed with bronzing liquid ; clear 
 the high lights by rubbing with a soft cloth, 
 allowing patches of the copper to show through 
 on the background also. Dry well, and 
 heighten the effect by drawing a brush, 
 containing pale gold bronze, damped with 
 bronzing liquid, and held horizontally, rapidly 
 backward and forward, catching lightly the 
 prominences. When dry, coat once or twice 
 with white glazing varnish. 
 
 This again may be toned, where more 
 subdued effect is desired, by a thin wash of 
 Terre Verte (oil colour), thinned with boiled 
 linseed oil, and more rubbing with a soft cloth, 
 to bring out, or keep under, the various portions 
 of relief. For the effects of Florentine bronzes, 
 copper and various shades of gold bronzing 
 powders are used, with Vandyck Brown for 
 shades. For antique bronzes use the same 
 materials as for “ bright green bronze,” laying 
 first a ground of green oil paint to obtain 
 depth in shade. When the lights have been 
 “ picked out ” in coloured bronzes rub a little 
 beeswax softened by turpentine to a thin 
 paste, and mixed with a very little of the 
 brown dryer, into the deepest shadows of your 
 panel, and a few moments later pass over them 
 a brush laden with Paris Green in fine dry 
 powder. Care should be taken not to inhale 
 the particles of loose powder that fly off 
 during the final polishing with a soft cloth or 
 chamois leather. 
 
 Some of the lincrusta and anaglypta are 
 embossed expressly to assist the decorator. 
 The most brilliant effects are attained by first 
 preparing a ground of gold or silver, then 
 
86 
 
 THE CYCLOPAEDIA OF HOME ARTS 
 
 painting in strongly, with coloured glazing the ornament in low relief, leaving bare the 
 varnishes, the raised pattern. As these dry remaining spaces of bright crude colour, pass 
 with great lapidity, an equal rapidity is a coat of white glazing varnish over the whole, 
 
 Design 216.—Lincrusta Decoration. Dwarf Fire-screen or Mirror Frame. 
 
 The border is in lincrusta (bronzed and tinted). The centre panel is in painted tapestry. (See p. 203.) 
 
 required in the laying of them. When a wash 
 of toning colour has been laid evenly upon 
 the background, and over some portions of 
 
 and finish by taking a sprinkling of gold dust 
 or bronze powder upon a soft bristle brush, 
 and polishing the surface briskly, finally using 
 
LINCRUSTA DECORATION 
 
 87 
 
 a chamois leather or a well-worn flannel 
 cloth. This last process blends and harmonises 
 the colouring purposely kept crude until the 
 end. Darker leathers may be coloured by 
 adding brown dryer and bronzes in powder to 
 
 A panelled dado of lincrusta or anaglypta, 
 decorated in white and gold, sets off ad¬ 
 mirably tapestries in Watteau and Boucher 
 styles; add frieze and borderings in rich 
 relief, or severely graceful, repeating or har- 
 
 oil colours, taking the precaution to mix them 
 well together with a palette-knife. 
 
 The fire-screen shown in the illustration is 
 an example of how a border of “ fruit pattern ” 
 in relief, bronzed and tinted, may be utilised 
 in conjunction with hand-painted tapestry. A 
 bevelled mirror may be substituted for the 
 latter. 
 
 monising with tones below, and supporting a 
 ceiling of delicate tracery, framing medallions 
 of cupids and flowers in painted tapestry, 
 letting the decoration melt toward the centre 
 into delicate gradation of soft blue sky, 
 and some idea may be formed of what 
 can be done with the aid of lincrusta or 
 anaglypta. 
 
METAL WORK 
 
 SAW-PIERCING. 
 
 Metal is hardly more difficult than wood to 
 work with the fret-saw. The designs given for 
 the latter (p. 57) will look very well cut in 
 sheet brass, copper or German silver, 
 with perhaps a few touches with the 
 graver here and there to bring out 
 parts that appear to overlap, or suggest 
 the veins of leaves or markings of 
 flowers. Etching may be employed 
 with better effect for the same purpose. 
 
 It is also a useful accessory to the 
 decoration of cut metal in connection 
 with wood-carving. The metal work, 
 to be effective in this case, must be 
 confined to those features where a 
 real or seeming added stability is in¬ 
 troduced by the employment of the 
 metal decoration : such, for example, 
 as strap-hinges and lock-plates on 
 cabinet doors; decorative hinges and 
 corners on caskets; or handle and 
 lock-plates on drawers. 
 
 pinning the cardboard patterns of them in 
 place upon the wood. You can thus prove 
 whether or not you have measured and drawn 
 them correctly. 
 
 Sheet metal of any thickness can be obtained 
 
 First make a paper or cardboard pattern of 
 each part of your object and test the parts by 
 
 of the dealers. No. 22 or No. 24 (thinner) is 
 recommended for decorative hinges, handle 
 
METAL WORK 
 
 89 
 
 plates, etc. The surface should be polished 
 with powdered pumice-stone and finished with 
 
 rotten-stone. If the best results are desired, 
 the metal should be sent to be “buffed,” by 
 
 which a perfect polish 
 is obtained. 
 
 The etched brass 
 hinge, design No. 222, 
 is one of a pair that 
 was used on the doors 
 of a small cupboard 9 
 inches above the top 
 of a writing desk. 
 The doors, each 12 x 4 
 inches, were too small 
 for any effective carv¬ 
 ing, but yet occupied 
 a position demanding 
 effective treatment 
 This was secured by 
 covering the doors 
 with a bold and ela¬ 
 borate design in metal. 
 
 Hinges of this de¬ 
 scription can be at¬ 
 tached to ordinary 
 brass butts by knock¬ 
 ing out the pin and 
 using halfoi the hinge 
 that contains the three 
 “bends,” to which is 
 attached (after bend¬ 
 ing the two projecting 
 
90 
 
 THE CYCLOPAEDIA OF HOME ARTS 
 
 ends) the newly designed hinge, and which 
 corresponds to the half that is thrown away. 
 If the amateur has any mechanical aptitude 
 
 he may readily and neatly do this; if not, 
 it should be intrusted to a skilled worker in 
 metal. 
 
 ETCHING ON METAL. 
 
 The principle of etching metal by acid for 
 decorative purposes is the same as for artistic 
 etchings (fully treated under Drawing). 
 The chief difference is that in artistic 
 etching the drawing is made on the metal 
 for the purpose of printing impressions 
 from it; in decorative etching the drawing 
 or design eaten into the metal is made for 
 its own sake, being the final and, indeed, 
 the only object sought. To prepare the 
 plate for etching cover the face with a thin 
 coating of wax, which can be readily spread 
 by heating the plate on the top of a kitchen 
 stove, and pouring the melted wax on it 
 from an iron ladle, holding the ladle with 
 the right hand, while the plate is held, by 
 means of a pair of nippers, with the left, turn¬ 
 ing the plate so as to spread the wax evenly 
 and allowing all the surplus to run off. 
 
 The best etching ground is obtained by 
 boiling refined wax four to six hours, which 
 removes the “ stickiness ” and makes it yield 
 readily to the needle-point in outlining, or 
 to the lead pencil, which is the best imple¬ 
 ment to use when portions of the back¬ 
 ground are to be cleared for the action of 
 the acid. When the wax is sufficiently 
 boiled, remove impurities by straining it 
 through a stretcher, or sieve, of thin, open 
 muslin. Strain into a shallow tin pan, 
 allowing it to form a cake three-eighths of 
 an inch in thickness. It can be readily 
 taken from the pan when cold and broken 
 into convenient pieces for use. 
 
 The design to be etched must be first 
 drawn on paper, when it may be transferred 
 to the waxed plate by means of black or 
 red carbon paper. The plate must, of 
 course, be waxed on face and back. When 
 the design has been transferred to the plate, 
 go over the lines with a dull point, being careful 
 that the lines are traced clear to the metal. 
 When the design has to be eaten completely 
 through, it is desirable to trace just outside of 
 the line, so that the eating away by the acid 
 may not encroach on the design. When the 
 
ETCHING ON METAL. 
 
 9i 
 
 design has been traced on the plate, place it in 
 a porcelain dish, or shallow wooden trough, and 
 pour pure nitric acid over it till it is covered 
 about a quarter of an inch. If the etching is 
 done in cold weather it is advisable to keep 
 the acid near the fire for some time before 
 using it, so that it may not chill the wax and 
 cause it to spring from the plate. The etching 
 should be done in the open air. The fumes 
 from the plate are not only disagreeable, but 
 they would, if confined to a room, rust every 
 metal article exposed to them. 
 
 If the design to be etched contains light line 
 surface decoration, five minutes of the bath will 
 probably eat it to a sufficient depth. The 
 plate must then be taken out and tested with a 
 point, to ascertain if the lines are deep enough. 
 If they are not, it must be returned to the bath, 
 When the light surface decoration is sufficiently 
 etched, wash it by pouring lukewarm water 
 over it; then dry with soft newspaper or 
 blotting-paper. Now “ stop out all such lines 
 as are eaten to the required depth, by passing 
 a “ heater ” over them, which will melt the wax 
 and cause it to fill the etched lines. The 
 heater is made of a piece of iron or copper 
 wire, three-sixteenths of an inch in diameter, 
 brought to a dull point and bent. Placed in 
 a handle and heated and brought into con¬ 
 tact with the wax already on the plate, or 
 with a small portion held in the left hand, 
 it can be readily melted and deposited where 
 required. 
 
 When the waxing up is completed—care 
 having been taken to repair, by means of the 
 heater, any portions where the wax may have 
 sprung from the plate—return the plate to the 
 bath. From thirty to sixty minutes may be 
 required for the acid to eat completely through 
 a No. 24 or No. 22 plate. If the design is not 
 entirely released by the acid from the back¬ 
 ground, use a narrow steel chisel to free it. A 
 little filing of the edges may be necessary to 
 bring them to a desirable finish. Holes to 
 secure the hinges, by means of round-headed 
 brass tacks, should not be etched, but drilled. 
 
 When the etching consists of a surface 
 design only, that is, where no portions are to 
 
 be eaten completely through, it is advisable to 
 
 Design 223.—Etching on Metal. Panel Hammered 
 and Etched. 
 
 use nitric acid diluted with an equal quantity 
 of water. 
 
92 
 
 THE CYCLOPAEDIA OF HOME ARTS 
 
 Design 224.—Doors of a Hanging Cabinet, with Panels of Etched Copper. 
 
 HAMMERED METAL. 
 
 I. MATERIALS.—ANNEALING. 
 
 Repouss6 or hammered decoration on thin 
 sheet metal is well within the abilities of the 
 average amateur of either sex. Gold, silver, 
 copper, brass and iron are all, to a certain 
 extent, available. 
 
 Gold, in its different alloys, is one of the best 
 metals for the purpose, it being extremely 
 dense, ductile and workable ; but from its cost, 
 and the high degree of skill required to produce 
 work of a character in keeping with the value 
 of the material used, it is unnecessary to speak 
 further of it here. 
 
 Silver, though expensive, is admirably suited 
 to the demands of the amateur. Sheet silver is 
 as hard and almost as springy as steel, and 
 must be annealed—an explanation of the 
 process will follow presently—in order to 
 remove the hardness induced by the rolling to 
 which it has been subjected. 
 
 Iron and soft steel are much used for 
 repouss6 work, and, in conjunction with other 
 metals, give beautiful results; but, as both are 
 of so hard a nature and somewhat intractable 
 in a cold state, the beginner, at least, may set 
 them aside as unavailable. 
 
 Between copper and brass there is not much 
 choice, and it may be assumed in what follows 
 that the methods referred to will answer in both 
 
 cases, unless a different treatment for the one 
 or the other should be suggested. 
 
 Annealing.—This is done by heating the 
 metal in a clear coal fire until it gets red hot 
 all over, and then placing it in ashes to cool 
 slowly. 
 
 The metal must now be carefully flattened. 
 Bend it as flat as possible with the fingers and 
 then rub the unevennesses out with the head of 
 a large smooth hammer, the plate resting on a 
 flat wooden block. 
 
 Selection of the Metal.—In choosing brass, 
 bear in mind that the metal of a ruddy tint 
 (when scraped) is generally softer and less 
 liable to crack than that of the ordinary tone. 
 This liability, however, depends largely on the 
 amount of annealing it has undergone. Care 
 should be taken, also, to select sheets free from 
 specks and flaws, these causing disfigurement 
 after the work is completed, not a little vexa¬ 
 tious where much effort has been expended on 
 the workmanship. 
 
 The most useful thicknesses of brass are 
 from 26 to 22 standard wire gauge, or from 6 
 to 10 metal gauge. If the repousse is to be 
 very elaborate, and of considerable relief, the 
 metal must be stout enough to bear, without 
 cracking, the consequent reduction of thickness 
 and occasional annealing. A thinner sheet can 
 be used when the amount of hammering it has 
 to undergo is not excessive. 
 
HAMMERED METAL 
 
 93 
 
 Copper may, with advantage, being slightly 
 softer, be of a thicker gauge than brass. 
 Should you be unable to obtain metal in flat 
 sheets, ready for use, you will have, of course, 
 to prepare it yourself, as that supplied by 
 dealers in rolls is too rough to be used without 
 preparation. To do so, cut off the piece re¬ 
 quired from the roll somewhat larger than is 
 necessary, selecting a part free from flaws. 
 Next thoroughly anneal the metal. 
 
 II. TOOLS AND APPLIANCES. 
 
 It is important to get the best tools. Try 
 them before buying them, or get .the salesman 
 
 24 ?j 26 2J 28 29 jo 3' 
 
 0 0 o O ° 0 0 o STEEL 
 
 j 2 jA 3 S 119 
 
 O“° 0 OD 0 RAISipq 
 
 31 38 39 4o < 2 ° ,2 ' 122 
 
 n 
 
 TOOLS 
 
 n 
 
 <") so S' & S3 S* JS 
 
 0 0 o o O O O RING 
 
 0 0 0 0 TOOLS 
 
 GQ 0 CD ltd 
 
 BRASS RA/SIRQ TOOLS 
 Figs. 225-227. 
 
 to do so for you. The “ temper ” of the steel 
 tools should be particularly examined, to see 
 that they are neither so hard as to be liable to 
 break almost at the first blow, nor yet so soft 
 that the edges “ turn ” after a little use. When 
 steel tools are properly tempered they usually 
 show a gradual change from a deep blue in 
 the centre, through straw colour, to a clear 
 polished steel tint at the point. Tracers and 
 the finer mats and punches demand more 
 careful tempering than other tools. All the 
 tools should be light, convenient to handle, 
 and from 4 to \\ inches in length. 
 
 The first requisite is a good steel or steel¬ 
 faced chaser’s hammer mounted on a proper 
 
 handle. The heads can be bought of various 
 weights and sizes, from if oz. up, but arc 
 not generally used for this work above 4 oz. 
 
 n ,2 /, 3 
 
 ,4 <5 
 
 • 6 
 
 <7 
 
 
 
 
 19- 2 c. 
 
 2 / 
 
 22 
 
 23 
 
 s=a sa 
 
 
 
 (T% 
 
 STEEL 
 
 TRACERS 
 
 PEARLS 
 
 Or 62 63 64 65 6 b 67 68 
 
 ° ^ ® ® © 
 
 69 70 p 72 123 73 74 72 7<* 
 
 mats or qroUrding tools 
 
 Figs. 228-230. 
 
 A good size is one of 2 \ to 3 oz. The handle 
 or stick must be of lancewood, from 7 to 9 
 inches in length, and very slender for a distance 
 of about six inches, the end terminating in a 
 knob of a flattened oval form. The illustration 
 will give a good idea of what is meant. The 
 great essentials in the hammer are lightness, 
 strength, and flexibility. 
 
 A Rawhide Mallet, handled after the same 
 manner as the hammer, will prove extremely 
 useful both for flattening the metal and for 
 roughly raising large surfaces, to be further 
 worked into form afterward with hammer 
 and tools. 
 
 n 73 
 
 79 
 
 (SO 
 
 a 1 
 
 32 
 
 33 
 
 34 83 
 
 
 $ © 
 
 
 
 a 
 
 .. "... 
 
 u 
 
 ^ (' 
 
 ) Q 
 
 
 36 
 
 h 
 
 .24 
 
 #5 
 
 i 2 b 
 
 ,27 
 
 82 
 
 89 
 
 Co 
 
 >!< < 
 
 O 
 
 30 
 
 O 
 
 QQ 
 
 OQ 
 
 OO 
 
 + 
 
 4 “ 
 
 
 
 kj 
 
 97 98 
 
 99 
 
 ub 
 
 nj /02 
 
 "5 
 
 ,03 
 
 /04 
 
 >°S 
 
 Co 
 
 © 
 
 * 1 * 
 
 *• 
 
 ^ fy 
 
 % 
 
 O 
 
 ©%i 
 
 O© 
 
 
 
 •Of t /2 
 
 "J 
 
 uA 
 
 108 
 
 709 
 
 III 
 
 
 
 ☆ 
 
 ☆ 
 
 m 
 
 JU 
 
 0 ^ 
 
 90 9/ 92 93 s4 95 98 
 
 rinrinnnn cM 
 
 Figs. 231, 232. 
 
 The Tracers with which the outlining and 
 similar processes are to be done are straight 
 and curved, thick and thin, and in length (of 
 
94 
 
 THE CYCLOPAEDIA OF HOME ARTS 
 
 cutting edge) from ^to f of an inch, according 
 to the fineness or boldness of the work required. 
 The most useful are those marked from 11 to 
 23 in the illustration. The one with which 
 the beginner usually learns to trace is numbered 
 16. It is an invaluable tool. But exercise 
 your own judgment as to the use of tools. 
 Use whichever you find best adapted to secure 
 the desired result. Two or three curved and 
 straight tracers are all that will be required 
 for some time. 
 
 Raising Tools.—A few of oval, oblong, and 
 
 times used for the purpose), to which the 
 metal to be operated upon must be attached, 
 and the cushion upon which the block is to 
 be laid when in use. 
 
 The Pitch Block.—Unless the metal has a 
 backing of some kind it will be almost im¬ 
 possible to impart shape to it, and unless this 
 backing is of a proper kind the worker will 
 be limited to the production of ornamentation 
 but little better in appearance than a series 
 of bruises. The only material which will 
 answer all requirements—viz., solidity, elasticity, 
 
 wnwv Millin' iw™ 11 " . m 1 1 !/ 1 i 1 rri / Mi 
 
 Fig. 233.—The Proper Position of the PIands for Repousse Metal Work. 
 
 The illustration shows the sheet metal resting upon the cement block, which itself rests upon a cushion, so 
 
 as to deaden the sound of the hammering. 
 
 vesica shapes and flat and bombe surfaces, 
 the smaller ones of finely finished and tempered 
 steel, and the larger of brass (which being 
 softer will enable the worker to raise the 
 metal without bruising it), and some ring tools, 
 pearls, and mats for producing a variety of 
 grounding and texture, are all that the 
 beginner needs to start with—say a set of 
 those numbered in the illustration 16, 2, 7, 
 43 > 53 ) 2 7 , 3 1 . 35 ) 37 > 63, and 88, which, of 
 course, could be added to as occasion required. 
 
 Appliances indispensable in repouss6 work 
 are the cement or pitch block (a bowl is some¬ 
 
 adhesiveness, and facility of application and 
 removal—will be found to be a compound of 
 soft pitch, resin, tallow, and powdered bath 
 brick, of about the consistency of shoemakers’ 
 wax. This is hard enough to prevent the 
 metal, while it is being worked upon, from 
 turning up at the edges, and yet tenacious 
 enough to hold it until the design is outlined. 
 You can get the cement ready made, either 
 in lumps for melting up, or already made into 
 pitch blocks. If you prefer to prepare it your¬ 
 self, you will find that the following recipe 
 will answer every purpose: Soft pitch, 7 lb. ; 
 
HAMMERED METAL 
 
 95 
 
 black resin, 4 lb.; tallow, 6 oz.; bath brick, 
 powdered, 6 lb. A commoner mixture for 
 filling bowls or vases is: Pitch, 3! lb. ; resin, 
 2 lb. ; tallow, \ lb. ; white sand heated and 
 then to be stirred in, 9 lb. These are to be 
 melted together over a slow fire in an iron 
 saucepan or pitch kettle. The addition of 
 more or less tallow will make the compound 
 harder or softer according to requirements. 
 
 A block about twelve inches square will be 
 quite large enough. When large pieces of 
 work have to be done (though it should be 
 arranged, as far as possible, to do such work 
 in small portions, to be afterward fitted 
 together), they must be worked in parts, the 
 
 A Spatula, or Smoothing Iron, will be needed 
 for levelling the cement after the work has 
 been removed from the block. 
 
 The Work-table should be so substantial 
 that it will neither shake nor vibrate at every 
 stroke of the hammer; it should have no 
 drawers, as they greatly increase the noise. 
 
 The Chair or Stool should be of such a 
 height that the work, when attached to the 
 cement block and placed in position on the 
 sand-bag, will be level with the middle of your 
 chest. You should always sit at your work. 
 The position chosen should be directly facing 
 a window, or with the right shoulder slightly 
 turned toward the window. 
 
 Fig. 234.—The Hammer and Mallet used for RepoussA Metal Work. 
 
 metal being shifted on the block until the 
 whole is completed. A block about 12 in. 
 by 9 in., if 1 in. thick, will require some 
 8 or 9 lb. of cement. 
 
 The Cushion on which the block is to be 
 laid when in use deadens the sound of the 
 blows of the hammer. It should be made 
 of canvas, or other material of close texture, 
 filled with sifted river sand, and should be 
 about i£ in. thick and rather larger than the 
 block. The cushion should not be quite 
 filled—three-quarters will be sufficient. 
 
 The Blow Lamp will be found useful in 
 many ways, especially in attaching the metal 
 to the cement block—as will be explained 
 presently,—and when, in elaborate work, you 
 wish to remove the pitch to see how you are 
 getting on. 
 
 III. PREPARATIONS FOR WORK. 
 
 Cut off a piece of metal, flatten and anneal 
 it as directed (page 92). Scour it thoroughly 
 with coarse (F) emery cloth and oil (colza or 
 lubricating) ; then with a finer (O) cloth rub 
 the metal in a circular direction until there 
 appears a fine graining all over the surface, 
 after which wipe off the oil and grit with a rag 
 on which a little turpentine has been poured. 
 The metal is now ready. 
 
 To Attach to the Cement Block.—Light the 
 blow lamp, the cotton of which must have 
 been previously soaked with methylated spirit, 
 and gently warm the surface of the cement by 
 blowing the flame upon it, taking care to 
 avoid burning it; this will cause the surface 
 to become level, should there be any slight 
 unevenness. If the cement block be very 
 
9 6 
 
 THE CYCLOPAEDIA OF HOME ARTS 
 
 uneven, the cement should be thoroughly 
 softened (not melted) and the block then laid, 
 cemented side downward, on a flat stone that 
 has been damped, and left there with a weight 
 upon it for half an hour or so. 
 
 Next, the metal must be made hot, rather 
 more so than can be comfortably held in the 
 hand, and then, while both it and the cement 
 are warm, laid, papered side uppermost, on the 
 cement. Press the metal firmly all over with 
 a cloth, to avoid burning the fingers, until 
 every part of it is in close contact with the 
 cement. Metal and cement must now be 
 allowed to cool for a while, so as to permit of 
 the transferring of the design. 
 
 IV. TRANSFERRING THE DESIGN. 
 
 Place (the black side of) a piece of carbon 
 paper on the metal, and over this lay the 
 design, face upward. With a bone point (or 
 knitting needle), press firmly over the lines in 
 the pattern, taking care that the latter does 
 not shift. Remove the paper, and the pattern 
 should appear in black on the metal. With 
 the etching point scratch in all the lines, and 
 add any that may by accident have been 
 missed. Wash out the transfer marks with a 
 little turpentine. 
 
 If you are handy with pen or pencil you 
 may sketch directly upon the metal, and then 
 point in with the etcher. Turpentine smeared 
 over the brass or copper will cause the pencil 
 to take more readily. For ink, the surface 
 must be scoured with a little fine sand, to 
 remove any trace of grease or finger marks. 
 
 V. THE FIRST ATTEMPT. 
 
 Take the hammer in the right hand and the 
 tracer (preferably the one marked No. 16) in 
 the left, holding it with the thumb and fore¬ 
 finger, about an inch and a half above the 
 cutting edge, the instrument pressing against 
 the second finger, which should be about half 
 an inch below the first, the tips of the third 
 and fourth fingers at the same time resting 
 upon the metal, and all touching each other. 
 
 The right position of hands and tools when 
 tracing are clearly shown in the illustration. 
 
 The Tracing or Outlining.—Place the point of 
 the tracer (which should rest against the 
 second finger) on some portion of the outline 
 in the left top corner of the work, slightly 
 tilting the tool backward over the other 
 fingers, so that the front point is just lifted off 
 the metal. Now strike the tool fairly on the 
 top with the hammer, and forcibly enough to 
 strongly indent the brass or copper, and 
 continue to do this with about the same degree 
 of rapidity with which a clock ticks, and if the 
 
 Design 225.—Exercise in “Tracing” or “Outlining 
 in Repousse Metal Work. 
 
 tool is properly held and the blows of the 
 hammer are given from the centre of its face, 
 the tracer will move forward toward the right, 
 cutting a line as it goes. Hold the tool with 
 only just sufficient grip to keep it from 
 slipping out of the hand, altering its angle, or 
 running off the line, and make the lines by a con¬ 
 tinuous forward movement—not by punching 
 the tool in, then shifting it and striking again, 
 and so on. You will, at first, find this more 
 difficult than it may appear. Probably you will 
 give feeble and uneven blows, first on one side 
 of the tool and then on the other, sometimes 
 
HAMMERED METAL 
 
 97 
 
 missing it and striking your fingers instead ; 
 then a fair and central blow ; next a blow with 
 the edge of the hammer head ; again, a blow 
 with the hammer turned on its side, or even 
 upside down. This describes pretty accurately 
 the first attempt of nearly every beginner. 
 But do not be discouraged. With patience 
 and perseverance you will soon get the re¬ 
 quired facility. 
 
 Trace all the lines in the pattern that run 
 from the left top corner to the right lower 
 corner, and all curves that have their concave 
 side toward the worker, starting always at the 
 top, and then turn the block round so as to 
 bring a fresh series of lines and curves into the 
 position occupied by those just done. 
 
 When curves of small diameter have to be 
 traced, it will be found necessary to tilt the 
 tool more on to its cutting point, and to strike 
 more rapidly than when tracing larger curves, 
 but without allowing the tool to travel any 
 faster. Indeed, it should rather be held back 
 than otherwise. 
 
 VI. FLAT CHASING. 
 
 With a tool like one of those marked 42, 50, 
 88, and 98, holding it in the same manner as 
 directed for the tracer, except that it must be 
 held more perpendicularly, punch the back¬ 
 ground of the design all over until the pattern 
 only remains with a plain surface. The force 
 
 of the blow from the hammer must always be 
 of the same strength, or the ground will be 
 sunk more deeply in one part than another ; 
 besides varying prominence will be given to 
 the tool marks, a defect that will stamp the 
 work as amateurish at once. The tool marks 
 of tools 42, 50, and 98 should be quite close 
 together ; those of 88 and similar ones slightly 
 separated. Occasionally the pattern may be 
 tooled over in parts with tools 61 to 72, but 
 do not attempt this until you have made con¬ 
 siderable progress in the management of the 
 tools generally. 
 
 Much that is beautiful and really artistic 
 can be done in this flat or surface chasing ; 
 and of course all objects, such as trays, table 
 tops, etc., in which it is absolutely necessary 
 to retain a flat and smooth surface, must be 
 thus treated. Most of the Benares and other 
 Indian work so much admired is executed in 
 flat chasing. 
 
 To obtain good effects in flat chasing, the 
 matted and plain portions should be about 
 equally balanced. It will, however, be rather 
 better to err on the side of too little matting 
 than on that of too much ; for when the matting 
 is overdone the design always appears attenu¬ 
 ated and amateurish. Pattern punches may 
 be used in this particular branch of repousse 
 work with much effect, if not employed so 
 lavishly as to give the idea that the whole of 
 
 Design 226.—Drawer Handle Plate in Repousse Brass. 
 
 7 
 

 
 
 
 
 98 
 
 THE CYCLOPAEDIA OF HOME ARTS 
 
 the pattern has been produced by such means. 
 For this purpose tools 86, 87, 88, 97, 103, 105, 
 108, 109, ill, 112, 115, and 126 are very 
 suitable. 
 
 VII. RAISING AND MODELLING. 
 
 Having acquired facility in flat chasing, you 
 may now attempt to give relief to a pattern 
 
 adhering to the metal with a rag soaked in 
 turpentine, slightly warming the plate again 
 and again if the cement is very refractory, of 
 course keeping the rag out of the way while 
 using the lamp. 
 
 To protect your work if it has to be left for 
 a time, turn the brass face downward upon the 
 table, laying a piece of paper beneath it, and 
 place a weight on the block. 
 
 £ 
 
 
 i 1 
 
 Design 227.—Match-box Holder, in Repousse Brass. 
 The sides are to be turned up at the dotted lines, and joined. 
 
 you have already traced. The first step is to 
 remove the metal from the cement block. To 
 effect this it is sufficient, usually, to drive a 
 broad, flat chisel between the metal and the 
 cement until they are forced apart. Should 
 the cement prove too tenacious, heat the metal 
 by means of the blow lamp and remove it 
 while hot with a pair of pliers. Now flatten 
 the cement on the block, as previously directed, 
 and, while it is cooling, clean off all the cement 
 
 When the metal and the cement blocks are 
 quite flat, warm both slightly, and put the 
 former, with its outlined side underneath, on 
 the cement, pressing it all over until every 
 part is attached in the same manner as when 
 it was being prepared for tracing. If the work 
 is large, start at once, without waiting for the 
 cooling of the cement, to raise those portions 
 that are to stand up in relief, by hammering 
 them into the cement by means of the largest 
 
HAMMERED METAL 
 
 99 
 
 raising tools that can be conveniently used ; 
 commencing at the points to be in greatest 
 relief, and working outward toward .the edges, 
 holding each tool much in the same manner as 
 when tracing, but more perpendicularly, and 
 
 depth all over the pattern first, and then going 
 over it again and still further deepening it 
 where required, until the whole looks like a 
 mould of the work it is desired to produce. 
 In raising, as in all the rest of the work, 
 
 Design 228.—Brass Sconce, with Cut-Glass Pendants. 
 
 The pendants utilised in this sconce were relics of a disused “crystal” chandelier, such as are not infrequently 
 
 found in the lumber room or attic. 
 
 slipping it slowly along by means of the 
 second finger without lifting the tool off the 
 metal. 
 
 The sinking (which is of course really the 
 raising when finished) should not be attempted 
 all at once, but by stages, giving a slight 
 
 proceed slowly, endeavouring to foresee the 
 effect the hollows will produce when seen as 
 raised lumps on the front side, so that no very 
 serious mistakes may be made which would 
 be difficult afterward to correct. To sink 
 a given space, even a simple hollow, smoothly 
 
IOO 
 
 THE CYCLOPAEDIA OF HOME ARTS 
 
 and entirely without bruises, will require much 
 practice ; so that for some time all complicated 
 modellings should be avoided, and only simple 
 forms attempted. 
 
 It is a good plan to mould the most difficult 
 portions in wax, and then to copy the modelling, 
 bearing in mind that the highest points in the 
 model should be those that are to be sunk 
 deepest on the side now being worked, and 
 that those of less relief should be proportion¬ 
 ately less in depth. 
 
 As the work has once more to be turned 
 over and again worked on its front side, it is 
 not necessary to add every detail at this stage; 
 all that need be aimed at is a generally correct 
 shaping in mass. Still, it should be noted that 
 an inexperienced hand can do very little on 
 the front side to raise any parts that have been 
 allowed to remain below their proper level ; 
 so that the work should be carefully examined 
 in detail, in order that such portions may be 
 put in before the plate is removed from the 
 block previous to turning it over, or it will 
 have to be attached again. 
 
 For raising large, smooth surfaces, as a plum, 
 for instance, the brass tool No. 7 is the best, 
 and for smaller surfaces, according as they are 
 to be flat or bombe , Nos. 4, 35, 27, 37, 3, 31, 34 
 are most likely to be useful. 
 
 When very large portions—as large, say, as 
 three inches across either way—have to be 
 raised, it is best, after the outlining has been done, 
 and before attaching the metal to the block, to 
 lay it face downward on the sand-bag, and then 
 to beat it with the mallet roughly into shape, 
 afterward fixing it to the block and completing 
 the process, as before explained. 
 
 When leaves or other similar objects rise 
 suddenly from the background, a strong line 
 must be traced, after the raising has been 
 effected, just inside the raised line caused by 
 the front outlining. This should be done with 
 a thick or blunt tool, such as Nos. 14, 15, or 17, 
 and then softened into the general body of the 
 relief with tool No. 37. The centre veins of 
 leaves may frequently be done in this way, but 
 when so done they must not be worked on the 
 front. 
 
 To obtain good effects in repousse, it is not 
 at all necessary, as is sometimes supposed, to 
 resort to high relief. It is more difficult to 
 model correctly and to maintain the due pro¬ 
 portion between the several parts in low than 
 in high relief. Sometimes, on removing the 
 metal from the block when the raising has been 
 completed, the amount of relief appears much 
 less than it was thought to be when seen from 
 the back ; but this, unless the design demands 
 high relief, need not cause disappointment, 
 provided only all is in due proportion ; for in 
 the finishing the height may be much enhanced 
 and all the desired effect secured. 
 
 VIII. FINISHING. 
 
 Having completed the raising and modelling, 
 carefully scrutinise every part of the work to 
 see that no mistakes have been overlooked. 
 The metal may now be again removed from 
 the block and thoroughly cleaned as before. 
 Next, fill up the hollows in the cement block 
 by pressing the spatula (which should have 
 been previously made nearly red-hot) into the 
 cement. This, as it pushes the melted cement 
 before it into the holes, fills them quite up. 
 While this is cooling, break up a few pieces of 
 cement and put them in the hollows at the 
 back of the plate just removed, hold the plate 
 with a pair of pliers over the lighted blow lamp 
 and so melt the pieces, until they flow and fill 
 up the sunk portions. When every hollow is 
 filled and the surface is quite level, allow the 
 whole work to cool. When it is quite set, warm 
 the surface of the cement on the plate and on 
 the cement block, just sufficiently to make them 
 adhere when the two surfaces are pressed 
 together in close contact. When the cement 
 is quite cold start the finishing or correction of 
 the modelling from the front side. 
 
 Take a thick blunt tracer, such as No. 15 or 
 16, and with it (wherever the background has 
 been raised out of the level by the beating up 
 of the design) go round the outline of the raised 
 parts, hammering the tool with just force 
 enough to carry it down to its original level. 
 At the same time try to force the metal at the 
 edge of the relief portions underneath by hold- 
 
HAMMERED METAL 
 
 loi 
 
 ing the tool at such an angle that its top shall 
 be well outside the work. This will tend to 
 sharpen up the outline and give the pattern 
 the effect of the undercutting so often seen in 
 carvings. Care must, of course, be exercised 
 to prevent the tool piercing the metal, which 
 would cause a crack or hole that an amateur 
 would find it very difficult to repair. This 
 undercutting process is extremely useful in the 
 treatment of foliage designs, as it offers the 
 best method for bringing the edge of a leaf 
 clear off the background without giving it a 
 thick and clumsy look. When the outline has 
 been forced back to its original position, care 
 having been exercised to prevent its being 
 driven below the general plane, the marks left 
 by the tracer may be smoothed away with 
 such tools as No. 56 or 37. Should the relief 
 obtained appear to be of too flat a character, 
 by commencing this operation at a little 
 distance from the relief and working the tool 
 toward it, something may be done to bring the 
 pattern up more prominently, especially if the 
 blows from the hammer are given in such a 
 way as to draw the tool along while striking it. 
 
 Now, correct the modelling of the raised 
 parts, smoothing out the bruises or marks that 
 the raising tools may have left, and softening 
 away all hardness, making the different forms 
 blend imperceptibly into each other, so that the 
 exact point at which a hollow begins to swell 
 into a protuberance may not be too clearly 
 apparent. Tools Nos. 26, 27, 34, Ii 8 and 37 
 will most easily effect the purpose when concave 
 surfaces have to be dealt with, and 3b, H9> an d 
 37 in the case of convex ones. 
 
 Of course, the whole of this process must be 
 lightly done, and in such a way that the relief 
 is not flattened down again. 
 
 IX. THE BACKGROUND. 
 
 The background must receive very careful 
 consideration not only as to design, which must 
 be well contrasted with the raised portions, but 
 as regards the execution as well. It is easy to 
 spoil a good piece of work on which great pains 
 have been expended, by carelessness in regard 
 
 to the background. Any unevenness in the 
 grounding will at once be detected by the eye. 
 
 The tool must be held upright and shifted 
 with the fingers at each stroke until the whole 
 ground is evenly covered, care being taken to 
 strike with the same force at each blow, so that 
 no part may be more deeply punched than 
 another. The mark of the general tool should 
 not be recognisable; each impression of it 
 should overlap the one made previously. 
 The small pearl or pointilloir (No. 98) will be 
 found very useful for ordinary purposes. When 
 the tool, however, is of a distinct pattern, such 
 as Nos. 86, 108, 109, 111, or 112, one impression 
 should not infringe on the next. There should 
 be just sufficient space left around each to 
 enable one to identify the pattern. Yet when 
 viewed from a little distance each mark should 
 be lost in an evenly-distributed mass. 
 
 X. TEXTURES. 
 
 Large and bold work may be considered 
 finished at the stage we have now reached, but 
 any object that is likely to be handled or 
 examined in detail may receive further treat¬ 
 ment. This will consist of giving certain 
 textures to the raised forms or to parts of them, 
 by means of the mat or grounding tools. Try 
 to produce even tracks of frosting, just the 
 width of the grounding tool, but free from 
 spottiness or single tool marks. In the case 
 of leaves and fruit somewhat naturalistically 
 treated, the texture should be applied more 
 particularly to the hollows or parts turned 
 away from the light ; the high lights may 
 remain quite smooth. 
 
 In representing the human form, flesh and 
 skin may be tooled over with a blunt tracer 
 small oval raising tool, or a nearly worn out 
 mat, like No. 72, but much care and skill will 
 be required to avoid a seamy appearance. 
 
 For leaves, experiment with Nos. 62, 66, and 
 70 mats, with tracer No. 16, or raising tools 25 
 to 33. For fruits with melon or pomegranate¬ 
 like skins use a well-worn No. 72 mat, or raising 
 tool No. 24. Cherries, grapes, etc., may be 
 tooled with a blunt tracer on the parts turned 
 away from the light ; but as they are somewhat 
 
102 
 
 THE CYCLOPEDIA OP' HOME ARTS 
 
 difficult to do neatly, perhaps they had best be 
 left plain. The skins of snakes, scaly reptiles, 
 and fish are best rendered with different grades 
 of a half-round tracer like No. 23 ; but they 
 must be punched on the underside of the work 
 immediately after the raising has been com¬ 
 pleted, and before the metal is turned over for 
 working on the front side. For conventional 
 animals with scales, such as dragons, a good 
 effect may be got by using an oval ring, punch¬ 
 ing it contiguously, and with its greater diameter 
 parallel to the sides of the part under treatment. 
 It is difficult, however, to find the oval tools for 
 sale at any tool shop. 
 
 Many rough-surfaced skins, both animal and 
 vegetable, may be effectively treated by punch¬ 
 ing, immediately after the raising has been 
 completed and before removal from the block, 
 the whole with a small pearl or raising tool 
 (Nos. 42 to 48) so closely that no particle of 
 plain surface is left. 
 
 You will make many discoveries for yourself, 
 and if you are wise you will add greatly to 
 your stock of knowledge by studying good 
 specimens of silver, copper, and brass repousse 
 in the museums and wherever else you can find 
 them. 
 
 XI. RAISING FROM THE BACK. 
 
 The instructions we have so far given cover 
 the work that an amateur is likely to undertake. 
 Sometimes, however, there may be necessary 
 variations of the mode of procedure prescribed : 
 as, for instance, in the case of a bowl or vase, 
 where the outside can be operated upon with 
 ordinary tools. In such a case there are two 
 methods for obtaining the desired result. For 
 the amateur the following will be the easier. 
 
 The vessel must be filled with cement (see 
 P* 94 )) laid upon a sand-bag, and the design 
 outlined upon it ; after which the ground 
 surrounding the pattern must be sunk by rather 
 heavily matting it with a suitable punch, begin¬ 
 ning at the centre of each space and working 
 therefrom toward the design it is desired to 
 laise. At each blow the metal will expand. 
 The blows being directed toward the centre 
 and consequently contracting the circle occupied 
 
 by the parts worked upon, the metal over and 
 above that which the reduced circle will contain 
 is forced into those parts untouched by the 
 tool, thereby bringing them into greater relief 
 and so attaining the object desired without 
 once touching the metal from the back. This 
 process can be applied also to flat panels when 
 no great relief is needed, but it will be found 
 more difficult for those than for bowls or vases ; 
 for, as there is nothing to prevent the whole 
 plate expanding, a good deal of practice is 
 necessary to find out the knack of making it 
 do so only at the point where the extra surface 
 gained by the expansion will be absorbed by 
 the parts to be in relief, instead of being lost in 
 a general increase of the size of the plate. The 
 relief thus gained, both in the case of the 
 
 Fig. 235.— Use of the Snarling Iron in Repousse 
 Work. 
 
 bowl and in that of the panel, must then be 
 carefully chased and modelled in proper shape 
 in the same way as explained for correcting 
 the raising in ordinary repousse. 
 
 The second method requires the use of a 
 tool called a snarling iron, which is merely a 
 stout bar of iron having an inch or two of its 
 length turned down at right angles at one end 
 and a round knob at the other. The turned- 
 down end is placed in the jaws of a strong vice, 
 and the vase, with the design drawn upon it, is 
 passed over the knob and held firmly in such 
 a position that the knob inside the vase is 
 exactly under the part to be raised. Then a 
 second worker with a heavy hammer strikes 
 the snarling iron smartly near the vice. The 
 force of the blow will travel along the iron and 
 be communicated thus to the underside of the 
 pattern on the vase, and thus, by repeated 
 
HAMMERED METAL 
 
 103 
 
 blows and a skilful shifting of the vase as the 
 pattern demands, a rough relief will be obtained, 
 which, like that gained by the other method, 
 must be properly chased up. The use of the 
 snarling iron is best explained by the illus¬ 
 tration. 
 
 In conclusion, we would advise the amateur 
 who may experience difficulty in cailying out 
 any of the foregoing instructions to consult 
 the Messrs. Gawthorp (their Art Metal Works 
 are in Long Acre), and if possible take a few 
 lessons from either of them, for they aie a 
 family of artificers. A little actual practice 
 with the tools, under expert supervision, is of 
 more value than any instruction that can be 
 acquired from even the best text-book. 
 
 XII. LACQUERING. 
 
 What varnish is to an oil painting, lacquer 
 should be to metal, i.e., a preservative from the 
 deteriorating influences of the atmosphere. 
 Generally speaking, 1 it may be used for no 
 other purpose. Although made from similai 
 materials (shellac, gums, and spirits) the lacquer 
 used for a finish to brasswork is quite another 
 preparation from the Japanese or Chinese 
 lacquer with which trays and similar wooden 
 objects are covered. Mr. Gawthorp gives us 
 the following directions for lacquering brass 
 
 “ Having obtained some French gold, which 
 must be kept carefully corked when not in use, 
 as the spirit in it quickly evaporates, pour out 
 just enough of it into a china vessel to cover 
 the hairs of the brush used. ' The brush should 
 be a good flat one, of the shape used to damp 
 letter-copying books, and just such a jar as is 
 used with it for that purpose would suffice, 
 although a flat, open one, not more than an 
 inch deep, would be better. To hold the latter, 
 a little wooden stand should be made, so that 
 one end of the vessel shall rest on the table, 
 the other being elevated about half an inch. 
 
 1 This qualification is necessary in view of the fact 
 that Mr. John W. Van Oost, who is connected with The 
 Art Amateur, of New York, has, by certain secret pro¬ 
 cesses, produced on metal—especially on brass some 
 wonderfully decorative effects in lacquer, which are 
 valuable on their own account. 
 
 Across the opening a wire must be stretched, 
 upon which the brush should be wiped after 
 each dip, to avoid drips. Now warm the object 
 
 Fig. 236.— RepoussS Bellows Mount, ready for 
 Finishing. 
 
 In cutting out the sheet metal for the mount, there must be 
 margin to allow for the thickness of the wood of the 
 bellows lift (see scolloped lines above). Wedge-like 
 forms are cut out around the edge. It will be observed 
 that the greater the curve, the closer these wedges come 
 together. Holes having been drilled or pricked in them, 
 they are turned to the proper angle by means of a pair 01 
 wide-nosed pliers. 
 
 to be lacquered to a heat that can just be 
 borne by the hand; and while it is hot care¬ 
 fully pass the brush, first dipped in lacquer 
 
104 
 
 THE CYCLOPAEDIA OF HOME ARTS 
 
 and wiped on the wire, over the surface, going 
 from end to end (or round and round, if the 
 article be circular) with one side of the brush, 
 and then back again with the other, carefully 
 joining the edges of the lines of lacquer. Then 
 dip the brush again in lacquer, and repeat the 
 process. If the article be a very large one, 
 however, it will perhaps be found that one dip 
 will only go once across. The whole surface 
 must be thus treated, and the metal warmed 
 again afterward, and as soon as the lacquer is 
 sufficiently dry the same process must be again 
 repeated, but beginning at the opposite corner, 
 so that the parts over which the full brush was 
 passed before will this time be covered by the 
 brush after it is somewhat emptied, the in¬ 
 tention being to equalise the lacquer over the 
 surface of the article. If after this the lacquer 
 appears iridescent, showing a variety of colours 
 the covering is still too thin, and another coat 
 must be put on. The metal should never be 
 
 so hot as to make the lacquer gizzle when it is 
 applied, but it will improve the brightness to 
 make it tolerably hot after lacquering. For 
 small articles a round brush, which should be 
 worked in all directions, may be used. 
 
 “ What lacquer remains in the brush must 
 be squeezed out and the brush soaked in 
 methylated spirits and afterward carefully 
 washed with soap and water (care being taken 
 to rinse out every particle of soap), so that 
 before it is put away all the hairs shall be 
 quite soft and free from lumps. The lacquer 
 left in the tray should not be poured back into 
 the vessel containing the clean lacquer, but 
 kept to be used on unimportant objects, or 
 made into furniture polish or liquid glue. The 
 jar should be washed out with spirits. Any 
 object spoiled in lacquering or requiring re¬ 
 lacquering may be cleansed before a new coat 
 is added by washing it with methylated spirits 
 or with boiling soda.” 
 
Back of 
 Foldout 
 Not Imaged 
 
BENT AND LIGHT WROUGHT-IRON WORK 
 
 3 
 
 TV 
 
 1 
 
 8 
 
 BENT AND LIGHT 
 WROUGHT-IRON WORK. 
 
 Probably there is nothing in artistic metal 
 work for the amateur which offers a more easy 
 and attractive field than bent-iron. The outlay 
 for tools and materials need be but trifling. 
 Besides a vice and a small block of iron, which 
 will serve as an anvil, you should have a pair 
 of metal-worker’s shears, two pairs of pliers— 
 one “ round-nosed,” one “ long-nosed ”—a table 
 vice, to fix on the edge of the working-table, 
 a bottle of black varnish and brush, a tape 
 measure, some narrow strips of sheet iron and 
 wire for binding it. The wire used by florists 
 for boutonnieres will do for most purposes. 
 
 The light strip 
 iron may be had 
 in., £ in., or 
 in. wide, and 
 about in. thick. 
 Strips about I2in. 
 long and not more 
 than \ in. wide 
 are the most 
 generally useful. 
 Even the lightest 
 strips are very 
 strong, and are 
 best to use for sus¬ 
 pended objects. 
 For standing ob¬ 
 jects, where rigid¬ 
 ity is necessary, the thicker kind is used, and 
 sometimes a rod of iron is twisted up with 
 it to support it properly. The metal should 
 be neither very flexible nor very stiff; it 
 should bend easily and uniformly, and, once 
 bent, should retain its shape. 
 
 The round-nosed pliers are used for bending ; 
 the long-nosed sort for clinching the small strips 
 which hold the curves together. The small 
 vice is needed for bending stronger strips at 
 right-angles, one end of the strip being screwed 
 between the jaws of the vice, so that the other 
 end may be hammered into shape. It is also 
 useful in making spirals. The tape measure 
 is used for determining the lengths of sym¬ 
 
 Figs. 237-239.—Method of Bind¬ 
 ing the Bent-Iron Strips. 
 
 !05 
 
 metrical waves, and the shears, of course, for 
 cutting the strips to measure. 
 
 In bending, take the strip of iron in the left 
 hand, the round-nosed pliers in the right, and 
 bend slightly the extreme end of the strip. It 
 is important to gain a true curve at the very 
 beginning. The 
 pliers should slip 
 slowly along, 
 bending the iron 
 evenly at all 
 points. If an 
 angle is un¬ 
 luckily made, it 
 can be reduced 
 by using the 
 long-nosed figs. 240, 241.— Curves in Bent- 
 pliers. When Iron Work. 
 
 two curves are 
 
 finished, they are connected by means of a 
 small binding piece, as is shown in fig. 129. 
 The strips may be fastened so that one end 
 laps over the other, which makes the stronger 
 joint, or end to end, which has the neater 
 appearance. The curves may be temporarily 
 fastened to a frame by wire to get them 
 properly arranged before binding. When the 
 articles are finished, two coats of black varnish 
 should be applied to prevent rusting. Design 
 No. 230 shows a visiting-card holder intended 
 to be fastened to the front door. The angular 
 frame is to be first made, the corners being 
 bent, as above explained, in the vice. It may 
 be made in two pieces, to be connected by a 
 binding piece, which must also aid to hold the 
 curved strip next 
 it in place. Every 
 curve should be 
 applied to the 
 drawing or to a 
 tracing laid flat 
 upon the table to Fig. 242.—Long-nosed Pliers. 
 make sure that it 
 
 is correct. It will save much time and trouble 
 if when the first curve of a pair is formed 
 the tape be used to take its measure, so 
 that the next piece may be cut of the same 
 length. In many patterns the same curve is 
 
Fig. 243.—Easel for the Menu Stand. 
 
 Fig. 244.— Perspective View of Menu Stand. 
 
 Design 229.—Menu Stand in Bent Iron. 
 
BENT AND LIGHT WROUGHT-IRON WORK 
 
 107 
 
 often repeated, and accuracy and method in 
 this respect are of the first importance; for if 
 the scrolls are not of equal size and all bent 
 true to the drawing, it will be impossible to 
 finish the piece. x For this reason the several 
 pieces should be placed together on the table 
 before binding, when any inaccuracy will at 
 once appear, and can either be corrected, or if 
 that be impossible, the erring scroll or scrolls 
 can be replaced by others properly bent. 
 When fastened together and varnished, the 
 piece must be laid aside to dry. A piece of 
 stiff cardboard is to be fastened to the back 
 of the frame, so that the visiting cards can be 
 slipped between it and the frame itself. 
 
 The neat little contrivance for holding a 
 watch (design No. 232), does not require 
 special comment. The longer horizontal strip 
 may be made slightly 
 concave, the better to 
 support the back of 
 the watch. Fig. 250 
 shows plainly the hook 
 by which the watch is 
 to be hung. 
 
 Design No. 229 may 
 be used either as a 
 menu stand or as a 
 photograph frame. It 
 should not give the 
 slightest trouble to the 
 beginner; the draw¬ 
 ings explain every¬ 
 thing. Each iron strip must be bent most 
 carefully to form the curves, and they are all 
 to be connected at the places shown in the 
 illustration by small binding pieces, as already 
 explained. Having completed the menu stand, 
 prepare the easel for it. To make a slip and 
 rest for the card, take a round iron wire and 
 bend it to the shape shown in fig. 244. The 
 ends of this wire should be bent round points 
 a and b of fig. 244 (see also side view, fig. 243) ; 
 and the rest should then be formed in such 
 a way as to give enough space for a card to 
 slip between it and the front part. The 
 stand will be finished by connecting the easel 
 with the top of the frame by means of wire. 
 
 Figs. 247, 248. 
 
 Design No. 233 suggests a treatment for a 
 candlestick. The materials are some sheet 
 iron, an old tin candlestick, and a few pieces of 
 iron wire about one-eighth or three-sixteenths 
 of an inch thick. 
 
 First rip the bottom from your old candle¬ 
 stick, and in its place 
 fasten a funnel-shaped 
 form of thin sheet iron 
 with a piece of stout 
 wire projecting down 
 from the bottom of it 
 to fasten the bottom 
 part of the scroll feet 
 to. Bend three sets of 
 scrolls the desired size 
 to form the legs, and 
 bind these to the 
 candlestick with iron 
 wire. 
 
 Design No. 2 3 5 affords 
 a suggestion for a collar 
 or cuff box. Six hoops 
 should be made of round iron wire or square 
 iron one-eighth of an inch in size—one from 
 the bottom, one from the top, and four for 
 the cylinder. 
 
 The bottom may be of thin wood bound 
 with one of the rings and made fast to the 
 lower edge of the cylinder. The top should be 
 fastened to the upper edge, with one piece of 
 ribbon to act as a hinge; opposite the hinge 
 may be a bow to act as a handle to lift the 
 cover up. The interior of the box should be 
 lined with silk of some bright colour, against 
 which the black iron scrolls will form a pleasing 
 contrast. 
 
 Design No. 234 suggests a pretty idea for 
 decorating the upper part of a doorway. 
 Some doorways are so high that to place a 
 curtain pole close under the soffit of the door 
 frame and hang a curtain from it would give 
 it a very long and drawn-out appearance. 
 This undesirable effect can be remedied by 
 placing a pretty wood or metal grille in the 
 upper part of the doorway and fastening 
 the curtain pole directly under it, from which 
 the curtains may be hung. 
 
 Fig. 249.—Side View of 
 the Card - holder 
 (Design 230). 
 

 
 
 io8 
 
 THE CYCLOPAEDIA OF HOME ARTS 
 
 To make a grille similar to the design shown 
 requires a few hours of patient work, and but a 
 small outlay for materials. It is always best 
 to work out on a smooth-top table an object of 
 this character. The full-sized detail should be 
 drawn out on a piece of smooth brown paper, 
 and as this is to lie flat on the table, it is an 
 easy matter to bend each iron scroll to conform 
 with the lines of the drawing. 
 
 Design 236 represents a grille for a window or 
 top part of a front door having a plate of clear 
 glass. The outside frame should be of stout 
 iron, perhaps one-sixteenth of an inch thick by 
 one-quarter of an inch wide. Bend this at the 
 corners, so that it will fit inside the style of the 
 door or window in which it is to be placed. 
 Allow it to be one-sixteenth of an inch smaller 
 all around than the style, so as to make room 
 for the bits of iron that will wrap around it, 
 which are necessary to hold the whole in place. 
 It is best to lay the frame down on a smooth- 
 top table over a piece of brown paper free from 
 creases or wrinkles, and mark with a pencil the 
 size of the frame ; then sketch in the full-sized 
 
 design as you would have the finished grille. 
 On this plan you can bend and fit each scroll 
 in place, and when you have worked out the 
 entire design in iron begin to fasten the pieces. 
 When fastening the rings to one another, always 
 clamp the little piece of fastening iron so that 
 it will hold the ends of the hoop and also hide 
 the joint, thus making it appear to be a jointless 
 band of iron. 
 
 The iron used in making these scrolls may 
 be bought at the ornamental iron-worker’s. It 
 should be cut in strips about one-quarter of an 
 inch wide, and in that shape it can be more 
 easily bent. It is generally best to use an old 
 pair of gloves or fingers of gloves when bending 
 the strips of iron, as otherwise the ragged 
 edges may chafe the skin, especially if the hands 
 are soft or tender. 
 
 All articles that are of iron and that are to 
 be black should be painted with a good and 
 lasting coat of lead black. 
 
 If your iron-work is to be exposed to the 
 weather, it is best to give it a coat or two of red 
 lead thinned with oil. This is a good waterproof 
 
 kD 
 
 € 
 
 yi 
 
 
 
 
 
 to 
 
 >C Vi 
 
 e) c 
 
 
 ftr 
 
 
 n 
 
 cK i l» 
 
 rw 
 
 Design 231. j 
 Bent-Iron Grille •! 
 
 FORMED BY A 
 
 Combination of \ 
 Scrolls. 
 
 LJ' . 
 
 \ 1- 
 
 5 * \ ! 
 
 
BENT AND LIGHT WROUGHT-IRON WORK 
 
 109 
 
 Design 232, 232A.—Watchstand and Back in Bent Iron. 
 
 Design 233.—Candlestick made, 
 of Sheet Iron and Iron Wire. 
 
IIO 
 
 THE CYCLOPAEDIA OF HOME ARTS 
 
 coating for metals that rust or corrode, and experience, however, you need not be afraid to 
 over it several coats of black may be placed to undertake it. Get a small " fairy lamp ” of 
 advantage to insure your iron against rust pressed glass, showing bright colours, and 
 
 Design 236.— Grille for a Street Door, 
 
 Design No. 240, representing a hanging lamp, prepare the frame work for it as follows: 
 is perhaps more difficult to make than any Bend an iron strip to a complete circle, fittincr 
 object we have yet mentioned. After some it around the step of the glass at the point 
 
11 2 
 
 THE CYCLOPAEDIA OF HOME ARTS 
 
 marked z, but not too tightly, allowing space with binding wire to the circular band of iron 
 enough for the curves shown in the plan and shown at w. The main curve of the bracket 
 
 at o p to fasten them by flat binding pieces to 
 the circle. To allow for these curves, take a 
 sufficiently long strip of iron. Fasten the curves 
 to the first-made circle, and be sure that the 
 glass fits into it. Before proceeding further, 
 satisfy yourself that you have finished this part 
 of the work properly. The next step is to form 
 the four large curves to which the chains are to 
 be fastened. Two of these are shown in fig. 251. 
 The four curves must be connected at their base 
 
 and Iron Wire. 
 
 which holds the lamp should be rather thick, 
 and not too flexible. Before fastening the 
 
BENT AND LIGHT WROUGHT-IRON WORK 
 
 1T 3 
 
 smaller curves to it, prepare two holes at b and 
 c as entrances for nails or screws, to attach the 
 bracket to the wall. For point a take a double¬ 
 headed nail (d), as it would be difficult to 
 handle a screw-driver at this point. The 
 making of the four chains will not be difficult 
 if you have followed exactly the suggestions 
 heretofore given. 
 
 Design No. 242, when worked out in thin 
 sheet iron, some round iron wire, a few pieces 
 of mica, and a little perseverance, produces 
 an old-fashioned hanging lantern. Form a 
 cylinder of sheet iron, about eight inches in 
 diameter by twelve inches high. Before 
 riveting the edges together, lay the sheet out 
 flat and cut round holes all over the surface, 
 and to the inside fasten thin discs of mica, such 
 as is used for doors of stoves. This fastening 
 process will require care, and is a little 
 tedious. 
 
 Lay the iron down on a piece of heavy 
 board, having one of the discs of mica under 
 the hole with half an inch of margin all around. 
 With a light hammer and a sharp-pointed awl 
 punch little holes around the edge of the hole 
 in the iron, and, with some small, oval-headed 
 copper tacks, rivet the mica fast to the iron. 
 Repeat this until you have closed up all the 
 holes ; then cut out a door four or five inches 
 wide by eight inches high, and roll your sheet 
 in cylindrical form again ; rivet the two edges 
 together with copper tacks, and fit the door in 
 place with two small sheet-brass hinges ; place 
 a catch on the opposite side of the door, and 
 the body of your lamp is complete. Next 
 make a conical top by rolling a sheet of iron 
 into the proper form ; a good pattern may be 
 made first by using a piece of stiff paper, and 
 
 when the desired shape is obtained, cutting 
 the iron into the same shape. Make crescent¬ 
 shaped cuts all around the top, as shown in fig. 
 245, and bend the little ears in to allow a vent 
 for the lamp or candle (fig. 246). Do not bend 
 these little ears down until you have riveted 
 roof or cap together at the edges, otherwise you 
 cannot bend it to form an even round top. 
 Fasten the top to the cylinder with little pieces 
 of L iron riveted to each. The inverted 
 funnel-piece at the top of the lamp, into which 
 the suspending ring is fastened, is a disc of 
 iron frilled into the funnel form and riveted 
 to the top of the roof (figs. 247 and 248). The 
 bottom of the lamp is a stiff piece of sheet 
 iron, with a few small holes punched in it to 
 allow a draught to the lamp. The chains are 
 bent from pieces of iron wire, and are held in 
 place by four scroll-pieces riveted fast to the 
 bottom. All the iron parts should be painted 
 black, and a pretty effect may be lent to the 
 glass by tinting it different colours. 
 
 Design No. 241 is for a hanging lantern for 
 a hall; the sides are of sheet iron, with the 
 square holes cut out; or it may be constructed 
 of iron bands, riveted in place with large¬ 
 headed copper tacks. Small pieces of mica 
 may be used in each opening, or a single large 
 pane of glass that will fill up one whole side. 
 A good height for this lamp is from sixteen to 
 twenty inches from the bottom to the top, not 
 including the ring or scrolls. The scrolls 
 should be made of iron about one-sixteenth of 
 an inch thick and three-eighths of an inch wide. 
 The lantern should be so constructed that one 
 side will act as a door. It should be fastened 
 at one edge with two hinges, and at the other 
 edge a catch should be placed. 
 
 8 
 
APPLIED DESIGN 
 
 PREPARATORY STUDY. 
 
 THE elements of Design are form and colour, 
 and these must be combined in accordance with 
 the principles of harmony and symmetry; or, 
 
 Fig. 252. Fig. 253. Fig. 254. 
 
 Element. Unit. Border. 
 
 as in the case of many Japanese designs, balance 
 may take the place of symmetry. 
 
 Symmetry is a repetition of parts. The part 
 which is repeated is an Element (fig. 252). 
 
 Figs. 255, 256.— Examples of Simple Borders. 
 
 When an Element is once repeated, or balanced, 
 it is called a unit (fig. 253). By repeating the 
 unit in different ways, as horizontally, vertically, 
 or about a centre, to cover a given space, you 
 
 Fig. 257. —Ancient Egyptian Border (Papyrus). 
 
 produce a design. Horizontally or vertically 
 repeated, it becomes a border (fig. 254)- R e ' 
 peated about a centre, it produces a rosette 
 (fig. 258). Units or rosettes repeated vertically 
 or horizontally produce all-over or diaper 
 patterns (p. 329). 
 
 An Applied Design is a design made for 
 
 some particular purpose: for instance, for a 
 wall-paper, a carpet, an oil-cloth, a china vase, 
 a stained-glass window, or a book-cover. It 
 must be specially suited to the particular pur¬ 
 pose and the particular material for which it 
 is to be used. 
 
 “ Can I prepare myself to become a designer 
 bv studying at home ? ” is often asked. The 
 answ r er is decidedly in the affirmative. 
 
 Let us take the one branch, the making of 
 designs for silk manufacture. Floral patterns 
 are always most desirable for these ; therefore 
 the first thing to do is to get an extended and 
 thorough knowledge of all flower forms. Here 
 is where your education can begin at home. 
 If you live in the country, so much the better, 
 because you are more likely to have oppor¬ 
 tunity for the study of flowers which best lend 
 themselves to graceful effects. Wild or single 
 
 Fig. 258.—A Unit repeated about a Centre, 
 becoming a Rosette. 
 
 blossoms are the ones which adapt themselves 
 most readily to the uses of fabric designs. 
 Always begin with simple flowers. Draw care¬ 
 fully, and with great fidelity to nature. Be 
 just as careful, in drawing a flower, to get the 
 exact proportions as you would be if you were 
 drawing from a cast or a model. Do not be 
 afraid that this extreme care will make your 
 work stiff or finicky-dash and freedom of 
 expression will come later. 
 
 In drawing a plant, study every distinguish¬ 
 ing point from its cradle to its grave. Of 
 course, you understand you are to draw the 
 entire plant—leaves, branches, and all. Take 
 
116 
 
 THE CYCLOPAEDIA OF HOME ARTS 
 
 the young plant, when the buds are just start¬ 
 ing ; draw it again when it is rich in flower 
 and leaf; and again when the seed-vessel is 
 forming or has matured. The seed-vessels are 
 often very beautiful things in design. In draw¬ 
 ing a flower, sketch it from different points of 
 view—full face, profile, three-quarters, back 
 view, or from any angle your ingenuity may 
 suggest ; besides being good training for your 
 
 being. For instance, there are the plants that 
 follow a perpendicular growth, like the lily 
 family. You will notice that they never grow 
 in any other way, and when you come to put 
 them into a design, you will know the nature 
 of the plant too well to distort it into fantastic 
 curves; you will preserve its leading charac¬ 
 teristics. Again, some plants follow a lateral 
 growth. In this case, the way in which the 
 
 eye and hand, you will find that a knowledge 
 of all these forms will be useful later on. Draw 
 all kinds of foliage with the same tender care. 
 You know what charming designs have been 
 made from the fern, the ivy, the maple, the 
 Virginia creeper, and many other simpler leaf 
 forms. You cannot tell what possibilities you 
 may yet discover in leaves. 
 
 Follow the lead of a plant in studying it. 
 A plant has as much character as a human 
 
 branches start and the curves they take should 
 be carefully studied. Then there is the cling¬ 
 ing, irresponsible plant, which, like some human 
 beings, clings to a support and follows the 
 line of least resistance. This is true of most 
 vines, though each vine has a different way of 
 clinging—a sort of individuality of its own. 
 
 It is well to first draw your plant as a whole. 
 Then draw the flower in a dozen different 
 positions. Make separate studies of leaves in 
 
PREPARATORY STUDY 
 
 ii 7 
 
 different sizes and stages of growth. Be very 
 particular about the ends of sprays. It is well 
 to make distinct studies of these. 
 
 Do not shade your drawings until you can 
 draw the outlines well. If you cannot draw 
 correctly the beautiful curves in which all plant 
 life abounds, first work long and patiently at 
 the outlines before doing anything else. When 
 you come to shading, block the shadows—that 
 
 will all be found useful for reference when you 
 come to apply these forms. Make innumerable 
 drawings of plants, keeping the parts of each 
 one together; you cannot have too many of 
 these studies. If you cannot get just the flower 
 that you want, take anything you can find, and 
 whatever is nearest you. When you draw a 
 separate spray, take that which is most graceful 
 or characteristic. 
 
 Fig. 275.— Almond Blossoms. Semi-conventional Treatment. 
 
 is, put in masses of shading, without any half¬ 
 shadows. You will see the reason for this 
 when you begin to apply the plant to practical 
 design. 
 
 Brown wrapping paper of ordinary quality 
 is as good as anything to draw on ; it makes a 
 pleasant background and takes the pencil well. 
 It is advisable to follow a uniform size for your 
 sketches, for the better means of preserving 
 them. Keep every one of your studies; they 
 
 Another branch of study which can be fol¬ 
 lowed at home, and which is of great importance, 
 is a knowledge of the literature of art. The 
 best artists are broad in their culture. Make 
 yourself acquainted with the styles of designing 
 that belong to different countries and periods. 
 Take up the epochs in art that are famous. 
 Try to find the leading characteristic of this 
 particular style of art—for instance, the art 
 of Italy during the Renaissance. The wood 
 
oll/V 
 
 279. —Diagram, explaining 
 some Botanical Terms. 
 
 The letters “P," “S,” “St." “PI," 
 stand for Petals, Sepals, Stamens, and 
 Pistils. Other common terms are as 
 A .. , . follows :— Anther, the outer Dart of a 
 
 ‘y ? 1 ’ th ^ ang , e between a leaf and the stem on the upper 
 Axillary, situated in an axil; Bracts, the leaves of a flowe, 
 cluster: Calyx, collectively, the sepals; Corolla, collectively, the petals - 
 
 firs 7 ™CvZ U l?lfe V ?h ly branC K ed b°wer cluster whose outer l&owere open 
 ’ k . the corymb, except that the inner flower opens first; 
 Involucre z 1 set of bracts around a flower cluster; Ovary, the seed- 
 vesse\- Pedicel, the footstalk of each separate flower of’a cluster- 
 Peduncle, z. flower-stalk ; Perianth, collectively, the calyx and corolla ’ 
 Peliote, the footstalk of a leaf; Pistil, the seed-bearing organ of a 
 having'im^ootsta?k^°c/ he calyx ! Se, J ate < saw-toothed; Sessile, sitting, 
 append ages°at e^base^ of”a Teaf-s^ al k f 1&n d ltS su PP ort J Stipules, leafy 
 
NATURAL AND CONVENTIONAL ORNAMENT 119 
 
 carvings, stone, and metal work of this period 
 are rich in suggestions. It is astonishing how 
 marked is the difference in taste of different 
 nations, and how distinctively this taste has 
 found expression in each nation s art. Every 
 one has some peculiar virtue for which it is 
 worth studying. Even the most primitive art 
 offers suggestions of value. What a field, for 
 instance, Celtic art alone opens for suggestion 
 in modern design ! 
 
 When you have acquired some knowledge 
 of the literature of art and a good deal of 
 geometrical and plant and other natural forms, 
 take up the study of ornamental construction 
 with Mr. Lewis F. Day’s “Anatomy of Pat¬ 
 tern” (B. T. Batsford, publisher, 52, High 
 Holborn). Follow with Mr. Gleeson White’s 
 “ Practical Designing ” (Geo. Bell & Sons, York 
 Street, Strand), an invaluable collection of 
 professional hints by specialists, for the pie- 
 paration of working drawings so that, techni¬ 
 cally, they would be acceptable to manu¬ 
 facturers of wall-papers, carpets, floor-cloths, 
 woven fabrics, pottery, metal work, stained 
 glass, and bookbinding. Intelligent assimila¬ 
 tion of the contents of these two little volumes 
 will be the best possible substitute for that 
 practical knowledge of the application of design 
 to manufactures which, in certain branches, 
 can only be acquired through actual connection 
 with the factory. 
 
 NATURAL AND CONVEN¬ 
 TIONAL ORNAMENT. 
 
 Practical knowledge of the application of 
 design to manufactures, as we have remarked, 
 can in certain branches only be acquit ed 
 through actual connection with the factory, 
 and the wise student would gladly avail himself 
 of any opportunity leading to that end, no 
 matter how humble might be the capacity in 
 which he might find employment. But it is 
 not there that he need expect to learn Design. 
 
 What is called designing in most factories, 
 and even in most schools where they pretend 
 to teach design, is simply the adaptation of 
 
 old ideas to new requirements, a work which 
 certainly calls for judgment and taste, but 
 which is not original design. The problem 
 usually set before a designer is, given a certain 
 space, to decorate it in a given style, and his 
 way of setting about it is simply to turn over 
 a book of plates or photographs and see what 
 he can take from this and what from that. Of 
 course, there is not much room for originality, 
 nor consequently for any real inteiest in such 
 work ; and when repeated, as it is, with me¬ 
 chanical exactness and without limit, it is 
 hardly wonderful that so much of it should be 
 found more tiresome than the blank spaces 
 that it is supposed to decorate. But amateurs 
 go too often to the other extreme, and, tired of 
 the mechanical repetition of known foims, copy 
 Nature in all her irregularity. The middle 
 way is the right way. 
 
 A geometrical groundwork is the common 
 element in all good design. More than this, 
 geometrical—that is, regular forms by them¬ 
 selves may produce very fine designs; irregular 
 forms will not, unless they are regularly dis¬ 
 posed. This is not, as is sometimes stated, 
 a result of technical conditions. It is a taste 
 which is common to all humanity; for it may 
 be laid down as a rule that, other things being 
 equal, we all prefer regularity to irregularity 
 and order to disorder. The aim of all art in 
 fact, even of the most naturalistic is to accent 
 and bring out the order that we find in Nature. 
 
 The first thing for the young designer to do, 
 then, is to work out in the proper materials 
 simple geometrical designs. Thrvt will teach 
 him their great decorative value, and give him 
 a training which will always be useful. 
 
 When he has made himself familiar with the 
 beauty that may be got out of simple com¬ 
 binations of squares and circles, stars and 
 crosses, and the like, he may look for some¬ 
 thing of the sort in Nature, and he will find 
 hints of it on every hand in the utmost 
 abundance and variety, but very seldom, in¬ 
 deed, more than a hint. All low-ground plants 
 and most free-growing twigs, when looked at 
 from above, show as crosses or stars or rosettes 
 of leaves, but all more or less irregular. But 
 
THE CYCLOPAEDIA OF HOME ARTS 
 
 in reducing these forms to ornament 
 it will be found best to stop short of 
 absolute regularity, for it gives an 
 additional pleasure to preserve some¬ 
 thing of the play and freedom of the 
 natural form. 
 
 This brings us to the consideration 
 of what is meant by conventionalising. 
 The term may be defined as the 
 making of an ornament from a natural 
 form, without destroying the identity 
 of the form itself, the less important 
 features being subordinated to the 
 limitations of the material to be 
 decorated. 
 
 In each handicraft conventional¬ 
 ising has its peculiar limitations and 
 differences. The treatment demanded 
 in one case may be improper, or, at 
 least, undesirable in another. For 
 instance, the worker in cloisonnt 
 enamels of necessity outlines his 
 design with a clearly defined line of 
 metal; but it does not follow that 
 
 Fig. 280.— Wild Rose. Decorative, but nearly Natural 
 Treatment. 
 
 Fig. 281.—Nasturtium and Leaves. Decorative, but nearly 
 Natural. 
 
 the china decorator should imitate 
 him with a line of colour, such as 
 is often seen in the work of more 
 than one pottery of reputation. 
 There are, of course, cases where 
 a clearly defined outline, of more 
 or less delicacy, is necessary to 
 give relief from the background 
 and add character, where the 
 worker is denied the many helps 
 of light, shade, and colour, which 
 would be available in a more 
 pictorial treatment. As we have 
 said, the line of the cloisonne 
 workman is a necessity; there is 
 an apparent reason for its being, 
 as there is for the decorative lead 
 lines in painted glass and the 
 “couched” outline in embroidery. 
 
 A semi-conventional arrange¬ 
 ment of some flower or shrub 
 retaining its more essential charac- 
 teiistics is apt to be more beauti¬ 
 ful than the severely conventional 
 
NATURAL AND CONVENTIONAL ORNAMENT 
 
 121 
 
 treatment of the same motive would be, and 
 at the same time conform to all technical 
 requirements. The two treatments of the 
 almond-blossom (figs. 274, 275) illustrate this 
 point. The first is a free-hand sketch indi¬ 
 cating, so far as composition is concerned, 
 no special thought beyond the limits of the 
 surface to be covered. Its beauty would 
 
 its unpretentiousness ; but such a decoration 
 is very attractive when the coloration follows 
 pretty closely that of nature and the conven¬ 
 tionality is confined to general outline and 
 background. Such a painting painted on 
 porcelain, for instance, would be suitable for a 
 door-panel or a cabinet, a position that would 
 destroy the beauty of the first because of the 
 
 Design 243. —The Hawthorn. Conventional Treatment. Especially suitable for Pyrogravure. 
 
 It will be observed that this design is equally available used vertically. It was originally intended for a 
 
 book-cover decoration. 
 
 depend principally upon the skill with which 
 it is coloured and the plant imitated. If a 
 masterly bit of flower-painting, it would deserve 
 the best light and position in the room, and 
 should not be relegated to fill an obscure 
 corner which would be as well supplied by such 
 a panel as the second. The latter shows an 
 artificial or conventional arrangement of the 
 same plant forms. It might be painted in 
 monochrome and still be pleasing, because of 
 
 ever-changing light that would be thrown 
 upon it. 
 
 That it is possible to depart much further 
 from natural form without sacrificing the 
 beauty of the motive is well illustrated in 
 the four different treatments of the hawthorn 
 blossom shown on pages 121, 122, 123, and 
 137, although in the final example the limits 
 of conventionalisation may be said to be well 
 nigh reached. 
 
122 
 
 THE CYCLOPAEDIA OF HOME ARTS 
 
 THE CONSTRUCTION OF 
 ORNAMENT. 
 
 Mr. Day observes that the popular idea of 
 the process of ornamental design is that the 
 artist has only to let his hand crawl over a 
 piece of paper, and, like a spider, spin out the 
 fancies that may crowd his fertile imagination. 
 
 school, from the set details of the classic to the 
 luxuriance of Arabic ornament, from the stiff 
 simplicity of savage pattern to the intricate 
 naturalistic decorations of Japanese art, is and 
 must be built up upon a geometrical frame¬ 
 work. 
 
 Through the courtesy of his publisher we are 
 allowed to reproduce some of Mr. Day’s ingeni¬ 
 
 Design 244. —The Hawthorn. Conventional Treatment. Suitable for Pyrogravure, Gesso, and 
 
 Wood-carving. 
 
 This design, like the preceding one, is equally available used vertically. It was originally intended for a 
 
 book-cover decoration. 
 
 He shows that, on the contrary, “ ornament is 
 constructed patiently, built up on lines inevita¬ 
 ble to its consistency—lines so simple that to 
 the expert it is not difficult to lay bare its very 
 skeleton ; and just as the physiologist divides 
 the natural world, according to anatomy, into 
 families and classes, so the ornamentist is able 
 to classify all pattern work according to its 
 structure, and to point out how few are the 
 varieties of skeleton on which all this variety 
 is framed.” For all repeating pattern of every 
 
 ous demonstrations of “ The Anatomy of 
 Pattern.” 1 (See pp. 124, 126, 127.) In this 
 treatise the number of skeletons revealed 
 and shown to underlie the whole mass of re¬ 
 peated patterns is singularly few. The stripe 
 naturally comes first, with its near kin the cross 
 line, yielding various checkers, and by simple 
 steps all the different frets and lattices, inter¬ 
 lacings and traceries, founded on parallel lines 
 
 1 “The Anatomy of Pattern,” B. T. Batsford, Publisher. 
 
THE CONSTRUCTION OF ORNAMENT 
 
 123 
 
 crossing each other at right angles, or diagon¬ 
 ally. Because almost always, in the case of 
 manufactured articles, a repeated pattern is 
 
 it might easily be inferred that all repeated 
 patterns are based upon squares like those of 
 a chessboard ; but, as we discover later on, the 
 
 Design 245. —The Hawthorn. Conventional Treatment. Especially suitable for 
 
 Pyrogravure. 
 
 printed from a square block (or the surface of 
 a roller which is practically the same shape, or 
 else woven into a square piece of the pattern,) 
 
 diamond so nearly allied is even more power¬ 
 ful ; for it provides the “ drop,” one of the most 
 valuable devices to avoid the too obvious 
 
124 
 
 THE CYCLOPAEDIA OF HOME ARTS 
 
 monotony of a series of checkers. The dia¬ 
 mond again is further elaborated by cutting it 
 in half; whence we obtain the triangle, with 
 the nearly related hexagon on which is built 
 the whole of the honeycomb ornament 
 
 So far we have considered skeletons based 
 upon straight lines only. But even with these 
 we have already the basis of that infinity of 
 geometric pattern found in Byzantine and 
 
 Moorish decoration. But with the introduction 
 of waved lines, as those in fig. 282, new series 
 of diapers are revealed that in effect, entirely 
 distinct from checker or diagonal lattices, are 
 yet based upon the latter to an extent that is 
 simply surprising when it is pointed out so 
 clearly as Mr. Day, by diagram and comment, 
 has managed to show it in his treatise. Take, 
 for instance, the Arab pattern shown in fig. 283, 
 
 apparently complicated beyond measure: by 
 the logic of actual experiment he proves it to 
 be based upon the diamond, the square, or the 
 interlacing circles. Whether the skeleton of 
 such construction is hidden by overlaid orna¬ 
 ment, as in the elaborate patterns of Moorish 
 art, or is merely taken as the groundwork of 
 repeated spots, or as the imaginary centres 
 whence the circles are struck, a few unalterable 
 
 Anatomy of Pattern,” by Lewis F. Day. 
 
 plans govern the whole field of repeating 
 designs in all classes of decorative art work. 
 
 From the specially shaded parts of the design 
 in fig. 287, we see how a repeated pattern that 
 is a common type of decoration upon all sorts 
 of fabrics may be taken as built either upon 
 the square, the diamond or the oblique 
 diamond, and yet in each instance be repeated 
 accurately. 
 
THE CONSTRUCTION OF ORNAMENT 
 
 125 
 
 The block of twenty-one inches is generally 
 adopted as the standard for all printed fabrics 
 and wall-papers. With this inflexible size 
 there are some startling limitations. For 
 instance, the hexagon can only be applied to 
 such a square on a very small scale. As Mr. 
 Day remarks, “If you made your hexagons 
 touching in honeycomb fashion ten and a half 
 inches wide, so as to get two in the width, 
 they would not come true in length; they 
 would be too long. If you made them true 
 they would not fill the square, but only a space 
 about 21x18. Three and a half hexagons in 
 the width would work, but only as a ‘ drop 
 
 pattern’ that would give hexagons of six 
 inches across. In order to occupy the square 
 with true hexagons, repeating without a ‘ drop,’ 
 they would need to be reduced to half that 
 size—that is to say, there would have to be seven 
 hexagons to the width, measuring each only 
 three inches across.” This one instance “ shows 
 how very strictly the artist is bound by con¬ 
 siderations which rarely occur to the uninitiated 
 —considerations which have always had a 
 great deal to do with the design of pattern 
 work.” 
 
 All designs for industrial purposes that are 
 to be applied to the fabric by machinery, by 
 
 printing or weaving, and that are to be placed 
 together to fit a given surface, must contain 
 a match and a repeat. A repeat is the pattern 
 repeated. The lower part of the design, where 
 the forms appear to be cut off, must exactly 
 match the forms repeated at the upper part 
 of the pattern. The two parts when repeated, 
 as they are through thousands of yards, must 
 form a perfect whole. 
 
 Look at any length of good wall-paper, 
 and you will readily see that the match is 
 so perfect that you cannot discover the repeat. 
 Of matches there are three kinds—“ plain,” 
 “ drop,” and “ turn-about.” A plain match 
 
 life 
 
 Wm 
 
 law 
 
 Sip 
 
 Ig?# 
 
 SISJ 
 
 Fig. 285.—A “Turn-about Match.” 
 
 is one in which the two parts of the same 
 figure are directly across the breadth of the 
 paper from each other. This is the simplest 
 form of match. 
 
 The “ drop ” is a device by means of which 
 the designer is enabled, without reducing the 
 scale of his work, to minimise the danger of 
 unseen stripes in the design, a danger which 
 is always imminent when the repeats occur 
 side by side upon the same level. For a 
 design printed or woven in squares obviously 
 must have the pattern so arranged as to 
 correspond precisely with the design upon 
 the other half of the material that is to be 
 
126 
 
 THE CYCLOPAEDIA OF HOME ARTS 
 
 joined to it. In any wall-paper this joint 
 is easily traceable; but by the drop pattern, 
 although the piece of stuff will fit to the side 
 of its fellow, the pattern does not occur exactly 
 on the same level. In the designs on fig. 287 
 and the upper pair on fig. 286 we see the 
 diamond yielding this drop; in the lower 
 
 pattern only six inches square when com¬ 
 pleted by the machinery is twelve inches 
 square. 
 
 How to Prove a Design by refitting its com¬ 
 ponent parts is shown by Mr. Day in fig. 288. 
 The worker is advised not to attach great 
 value to the appearance of the design as a 
 
 Figs. 2S6, 287.— By Lewis F. Day (from “The Anatomy of Pattern”). Illustrating the “Drop Match, 5 ' 
 and the Effect of the Drop, according to its Length, etc. 
 
 The right-hand example (No. 287) shows three plans, on either of which the same simple pattern may be produced. 
 
 designs of fig. 286 square blocks are so arranged 
 to give the same effect. This feature applies 
 equally to carpets—in fact, to all surface 
 ornament. 
 
 In the “ turn-about ” match (fig. 285) only 
 one-fourth of the pattern is made, and the 
 machine in turning about completes the 
 figure. This is the economy of design, for a 
 
 drawing, but to cut it up deliberately and 
 rearrange the parts in order to prove the 
 repeat. This is one of the practical devices 
 that an amateur would be fearful of trying, 
 were it not recommended by one who knows. 
 No amount of accurate measurement can give 
 so certain a result as this cutting up and 
 re-arranging the actual drawing. By this 
 
WALL-PAPER DESIGNING 
 
 l2 7 
 
 means you see at once the way each line or 
 curve meets its fellow and how far it disguises 
 the joint which, if allowed to betray itself, ruins 
 the design as a whole. 
 
 WALL-PAPER. 
 
 Manufacturers, as a rule, prefer simple 
 patterns conventionally treated to floral and 
 other patterns needing many printings. The 
 more colours, or shades of the same colour , that 
 are called for in a design, the more printings 
 are required to reproduce that design, and 
 hence, as a rule, the smaller the chance of 
 its acceptance by the manufacturer. In esti¬ 
 mating the number of printings required, each 
 shade has to be reckoned as a separate colour, 
 because it calls for a separate printing. A 
 single printing will only give a perfectly flat 
 impression— i.e., uniform in light and shade. 
 The only possible modification of this uni¬ 
 formity is by means of stippling (see p. 61), 
 which breaks the tones of the parts so treated. 
 This device is seldom resorted to except in 
 the case of very cheap wall-papers, and need 
 not be taken into account by the novice in 
 designing. 
 
 Avoid the use of pronounced figures and 
 any arrangement that tends to produce the 
 effect of horizontal lines, and remember that 
 although a pattern may be pleasing on a small 
 piece of paper, it may weary the eye and 
 lose character when spread over a large 
 surface like that of a wall. 
 
 More than ordinary ingenuity is required 
 for borders, even when not elaborate in design, 
 for they have the disadvantage of perpendicular 
 and horizontal positions. The field, in general 
 colour and arrangement, is like the hanging, 
 but the guards are darker and stronger in 
 colour, and unless they are only bands they 
 are composed of conventionalised leaves or 
 flowers, or it may be of geometrical figures. 
 
 Dimensions of a Design.—Almost invariably 
 the dimensions of a design for an English wall¬ 
 paper are 21 in. x 21 in., the paper itself being 
 22 in., the extra inch allowing a margin on 
 
 each side for the register 1 of the block in print¬ 
 ing, and also as a protection to the edges of 
 the roll. 2 The space, 21 in. x 21 in., may be 
 divided into squares of five different dimensions 
 as follows: First, four squares of 10J in. x 
 10J in. ; second, nine squares of 7 in. ; third, 
 sixteen squares of 5^ in. ; fourth, twenty-five 
 squares of 4^ in. ; fifth, forty-nine squares of 
 3 in. Mr. George C. Haite, in his admirably 
 lucid paper on Wall-Papers, in “Practical Design¬ 
 ing,” which no student of the subject can afford 
 
 Fig. 288.—Diagram by Lewis F. Day, showing how 
 to prove a “Drop” Design. 
 
 (From “The Anatomy of Pattern.” B. T. Batsford, Publisher.) 
 
 to miss, points out that these five divisions of 
 the space “ would limit the fancy and play 
 of the designer, were it not possible to get over 
 the difficulty by a still further division of the 
 
 1 The Register indicates on the paper the limits of a 
 certain colour, upon which the successive printings of the 
 other colours of the design must not impinge. The 
 adjustment of the register in all colour printing must be 
 extremely accurate. 
 
 2 The length of a roll of wall-paper is twelve yards. 
 
128 
 
 THE CYCLOPAEDIA OF HOME ARTS 
 
 width by means of what is called stepping 
 
 the design — a 
 method which is 
 most valuable and 
 of frequent use ; 
 for it is not only 
 that by this means 
 a different scale 
 of work is possi¬ 
 ble, but that by 
 its adoption we 
 are enabled to 
 better disguise 
 the ‘repeat’ and 
 to render the effect 
 of a mass of 
 ‘ repeats ’ cover¬ 
 ing a large surface 
 more satisfactory and pleasant in line.” 
 
 The Repeat.—The principles of the “ repeat ” 
 and the application of the device of “ stepping ” 
 are set forth clearly by Mr. Haitd 1 A pattern, 
 he says, “ should either boldly declare its 
 repeat, and indeed make a feature of it, or it 
 should not be noticeable at all ; and, further, 
 all repeats should 
 avoiding disagree¬ 
 able lines, some of 
 which may even 
 make the wall ap¬ 
 pear out of the 
 upright or undu¬ 
 lating. Unless 
 intentional, as a 
 feature of the pat¬ 
 tern, it is well to 
 disguise all lines. 
 
 The perpendicular 
 is less objection¬ 
 able than the hori¬ 
 zontal, and the true 
 diagonal line less 
 so than either.” A practical explanation of the 
 meaning of “repeat” is given in fig. 289: the 
 sides C and D must join, and the top, A, must 
 
 1 We are indebted to the courtesy of the publishers, 
 Messrs. Geo. Bell & Sons, for the use of these dia¬ 
 grams, from “ Practical Designing.” 
 
 join the bottom, B. The difference between 
 the sides and the top and bottom of a wall¬ 
 paper is that “ on the sides the repeat must be 
 cut off absolutely in a straight line, and join ; 
 while at the top and bottom figures—such as 
 a small rosette, a leaf, or centre of a flower— 
 may be allowed to complete themselves, and 
 the top be made to fit into the bottom (fig. 290); 
 but in designing it is always desirable to run 
 the drawing over the lines of repeat and make 
 it fit into both sides and bottom, as in fig. 291.” 
 
 “ Stepping” is illustrated in figs. 292, 293, 294. 
 
 Fig. 291.—The “Repeat.” 
 
 The drawing is run over the lines of “ repeat ” and made 
 to fit into both sides and bottom. 
 
 “ The step is the division of the space into half, 
 and the top left-hand corner, C, is made to 
 join the centre , D, on the right-hand side instead 
 of at the top. The ordinary method of repeat 
 would be that shown in fig. 294, but it will be 
 seen that the flowers fall in horizontal lines, 
 while it may be desired that the flowers should 
 form diagonal lines, and at the same time suffer 
 no loss in scale. This can only be done by 
 stepping on the sides of the pattern, as shown 
 in fig. 292, and get the result as in fig. 293.” 
 
 It is always wise to colour designs before 
 offering them for sale, as manufacturers do not 
 like to select from mere sketches. Colour rather 
 more than one complete section, so as to prove 
 the accuracy of the repeat. 
 
 1 
 
 Fig. 289.—The “Repeat” 
 Principle. 
 
 The sides, C, D, must join, and the 
 top, A, must join the bottom, B. 
 
 be pleasant to the eye, 
 
 
 . • 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 Fig. 290.—The “Repeat.” 
 
 The pattern is cut off at the sides, 
 but fits in top and bottom. 
 
TEXTILE DESIGNING 
 
 129 
 
 TEXTILES—CARPETS. 
 
 THERE are three ways of applying a pattern 
 to a fabric : First, by printing the design on 
 the material after it is woven, as in calico, oil¬ 
 cloth, and linoleum ; second, by printing the 
 pattern on the threads before they are woven, 
 as in tapestry Brussels and tapestry velvet 
 carpets ; and, third, by taking various coloured 
 
 threads and bringing 
 
 & 
 
 $ 
 
 Fig. 292.—The “Stepping 
 Method. 
 
 them to the surface 
 wherever the pattern 
 requires by means of 
 the Jacquard loom, 
 as in body-Brussels 
 and Wiltons. 
 
 The great desider¬ 
 atum in making 
 designs to be printed 
 is to use as few 
 colours and make each colour produce as 
 much effect as possible ; for the reason that 
 in printed goods each colour introduced calls 
 for a separate block with such parts of the 
 design as employ that colour cut upon it. 
 Each block is an ad¬ 
 ditional expense, and 
 although a calico or 
 chintz printed in 
 seven colours will 
 bring no higher price 
 to the manufacturer 
 than a piece requiring 
 only one, still it costs 
 him seven times as 
 much to have the 
 blocks cut for print¬ 
 ing it, and therefore 
 his profits will be so 
 much the less. It is 
 the lack of knowledge 
 on this, among other 
 considerations, in the 
 preparation of designs offered for sale by 
 amateurs inexperienced in the requirements 
 of the trade, that almost invariably renders 
 them unavailable. 
 
 How much may be done by the skilful use 
 
 Fig. 294.—Ordinary 
 “ Repeat.” 
 
 Fig. 293.—“Repeat" by the “Stepping” Method. 
 
 of a single colour is illustrated in fig. 295, which 
 shows how four effects or shades may be gained 
 by using only black. We have here white 
 (the cloth itself), light gray, dark gray and 
 black. If in place of the black we use blue in 
 the same way, we have white, with light, 
 medium, and dark 
 blue, still using but 
 one colour. There 
 are many ways in 
 which a skilful de¬ 
 signer can make 
 admirable use of one 
 or two colours ; each 
 additional colour 
 greatly increases his 
 resources for new 
 effects, so that to the 
 uninitiated it would 
 always seem that 
 there are many more 
 colours employed than there really are. 
 
 In the second method of applying a design 
 (where the printing is done on the threads 
 before they are woven), it makes but little 
 , difference how many 
 
 tints are used. One 
 dye being of the same 
 price as another, or 
 at least the difference 
 in price being but 
 slight, it is little 
 matter which colour 
 box is brought into 
 requisition. In print¬ 
 ing the threads a large 
 drum (illustrated 
 herewith) is used, 
 around which the 
 threads are wound. 
 On one edge of this 
 drum are ratchets as 
 far apart as the width 
 of a print—about three-eighths of an inch for a 
 tapestry Brussels and half an inch for tapestry 
 velvet. As this drum revolves, a colour box in 
 which there is a revolving wheel passes back 
 and forth under the drum, the wheel in the box 
 
 9 
 
130 
 
 THE CYCLOPAEDIA OF HOME ARTS 
 
 carrying the colour or dye up and printing a 
 line of colour across the threads on the drum 
 during its passage. If the pattern requires the 
 same dye for several loops in the carpet the 
 same colour box goes back and forth the re¬ 
 quisite number of times. If a different colour is 
 
 in 
 
 
 I 
 
 H 
 
 
 
 
 
 1 
 
 
 Fig. 295.—Applied Design. Printed Fabric 
 
 Showing four effects or shades that may be gained by 
 using only black. 
 
 required, a different colour box is substituted, 
 until the wool is all dyed, in bands of colours 
 of different widths. The skein is then removed 
 from the wheel, steamed to set the colours, and 
 forms a single thread throughout the length of 
 a breadth of carpet. Thus line after line is 
 taken until enough are printed—no two alike— 
 to form the entire pattern. 
 
 For a five-frame body-Brussels but five 
 colours may appear in any one line through¬ 
 out the length of a breadth. If you wish, 
 five entirely distinct colours may appear on 
 the next line, and so on. Therefore, although 
 there can be but five colours in any one line, 
 still there may be many colours in the carpet. 
 
 Opposite is shown a section of a five-frame 
 body-Brussels design with eight colours in 
 all, but so arranged that only five colours 
 appear in any one vertical line, as may easily 
 be seen by the “ plant,” as it is technically 
 called. 
 
 Mr. Alexander Millar 1 broadly divides carpets 
 
 1 “ Practical Designing ” (Geo. Bell & Sons, pub¬ 
 lishers). 
 
 into three classes (i.e. for designing purposes), 
 as follows: (1) Those in which the design is 
 produced by the action of a Jacquard loom ; 
 (2) those which may be grouped under the 
 head of Axminster; (3) tapestries. In the 
 first class (in which are included Brussels and 
 Wilton, and also Kidderminster carpets) there is 
 a limit to the number of colours employed. In 
 the second and third there is theoretically 
 none. For designing purposes Brussels and 
 Wilton carpets are identical ; either can be 
 woven from a design prepared for the other ; 
 in Wilton, however, the design will come out a 
 very little shorter than in Brussels. 
 
 Fig. 296.—Colouring Drum used in Applying 
 Designs. 
 
 w, wools; i i, colours printed on the wools; R, ratchets ; 
 F, frame to support drum ; S, where girls stand to comb 
 wools; T, track for the colour box; P, colour box; 
 0 , pulleys; c, c, endless chain for drawing colour box 
 back and forth. 
 
 Brussels designs for filling are always 27 
 in. wide. Borders may be 13, 18, or 22| in. 
 The most usual width is 18 in. Full- 
 sized design paper is often used, but many 
 prefer a paper which is rather more than half¬ 
 size—16 in. wide, representing 27 in. Which¬ 
 ever is used there should be 9 points to 
 the inch in the length, and 256 points in the 
 
TEXTILE DESIGNING 
 
 27-in. width. There is no fixed rule as to 
 length, but from 27 to 36 in. is suitable for 
 small designs, and 45 to 54 in. for large 
 ones. The length should be no greater than 
 is necessary to avoid too frequent repetition of 
 prominent objects. 
 
 Axminster does not involve the care of 
 “planting,” but it has difficulties of its own. 
 The design is much coarser than for Brussels. 
 The design paper for the latter contains about 
 
 131 
 
 particulars of widths and lengths given for 
 Brussels patterns apply also to Axminster in 
 breadths. 
 
 Kidder, carpets have their pattern formed 
 mainly by the weft threads {i.e. running across 
 the carpet). In Wilton, Brussels, and tapestry 
 it is formed wholly of the warp thread {i.e. in 
 the direction of the length). In Axminster 
 neither warp nor weft is seen, the pattern 
 being formed from a third set of threads, 
 
 □ m GoZa _ H Green .. □ Jj fWUO. 
 
 M JHuZOivumr. Bn jnarroru ■ jBlacK. B jSkxaicr 
 
 Fig. 297.—Brussels Carpet Design. 
 
 85 points to the square inch (9 x nearly) ; 
 for Axminster it usually ranges between 27 
 and 70, although the “ pitch ” {i.e. the number 
 of squares or points to the inch) is sometimes 
 finer and sometimes coarser. To hit upon 
 just about the right amount of detail that is 
 practicable under the circumstances is no easy 
 matter. It must be borne in mind that there 
 must be no insensible gradation. Every shade 
 must be level, solid, and clearly defined, no 
 matter how light it be or how dark. The 
 
 inserted by various methods, so as to form 
 a pile surface. 
 
 In tapestry carpets the pitch is about the 
 same as for Brussels, and the same conditions 
 hold good as to widths, etc. There is no 
 limitation of colour, and a design adapted to a 
 fine grade of Axminster would do for tapestry. 
 
 For a thorough comprehension of the techni¬ 
 cal requirements in carpet designing, Mr. 
 Millar’s article, to which we are indebted mainly 
 for the foregoing paragraphs, should be read in 
 
132 
 
 THE CYCLOPAEDIA OF HOME ARTS 
 
 its entirety and carefully digested. We may 
 give, further, the following summary of im¬ 
 portant points that he makes for the guidance 
 of the novice :— 
 
 Make your designs full size, and on ruled or 
 ‘‘point" paper. Always keep in mind the 
 “ pitch ” for which you are working. All manu¬ 
 facturers do not use the same paper, and it is 
 important to find out what are the requirements 
 
 bad colour, but good colour will sometimes be 
 allowed to offset defects of form. A Brussels 
 design which is unsatisfactory in colour may 
 sometimes be rendered available by means of 
 “ loom changes ” ; but not so with an Axminster 
 design, to alter the colour of which often in¬ 
 volves an amount of artistic work equal to the 
 creation of a new design. Therefore, unless 
 you have a decided talent for colour, do not 
 
 in this respect before beginning your design. 
 As a general thing, 9 points to the inch is the 
 standard for Brussels carpeting, and from 7 to 
 5 for Axminster. 
 
 Assuming, of course, that your design con¬ 
 forms to the technical requirements of the 
 manufacturer, the general colour effect is what 
 will influence him most as to its availability 
 from the commercial point of view. No 
 amount of good ornament will compensate for 
 
 attempt Axminster carpets, except for the 
 simplest effects. Mr. Millar also gives the 
 following excellent advice :— 
 
 “ Never make a design vaguely for a carpet. 
 Always have a definite fabric in view. Having 
 chosen this, study its special requirements as 
 to the number and arrangement of colours, and 
 as to the special ruled paper to be used for it, 
 and keep to it until you have mastered them. 
 Keep a piece of the fabric for which you are 
 
TILE DESIGNING 
 
 133 
 
 working beside you. Keep also a piece of the 
 special ruled paper from which it is woven, 
 and carry out portions, if not the whole of this, 
 full size. 
 
 “ Copy out and lay together several repeats 
 of the first rough sketch, to avoid striping and 
 awkward lines.” 
 
 TILES. 
 
 In an article on “Designing for Tiles,” 1 Mr. 
 Owen Carter classifies as follows the several 
 kinds of designs for tiles: (1) Plain geometrical 
 floor tiling; (2) Encaustic floor tiling, alone or 
 in combination with class 1 ; (3) Mosaic floor 
 and wall tiling ; (4) Plain, embossed, or printed 
 tiles, either alone or combined, for wall surface 
 decoration; (5) Hearth and grate cheeks ; 
 (6) Faience. Designs for all the foregoing, 
 he points out, would be prepared by the 
 combination of a greater or less number of 
 individual tiles worked together to form a 
 pattern, which latter may again be subdivided 
 into (7) Encaustic floor tiles ; (8) Glazed em¬ 
 bossed tiles; (9) Painted tiles ; (10) Painted 
 tiles either with a complete design on each, or 
 united for fireplace panels, etc., or in ceramic 
 pictures illustrating historical or other subjects. 
 
 As to the colouring of the designs, Mr. Carter 
 recommends body colours for classes 1, 2, 3, 
 
 1 “Practical Designing” (George Bell & Sons, pub¬ 
 lishers). 
 
 and 7, and for Nos. 4, 5, 6, 8, 9, and 10 the 
 ordinary water colours in washes. The design 
 is drawn in lead-pencil before the colouring, 
 and if it is a geometrical pattern it should be 
 lined up with a hard pencil or India ink after 
 the colouring. The usual scale for designs for 
 floors and walls is one inch, but half, three- 
 quarters, and one-and-a-half inches are also 
 used if found more convenient. 
 
 The study of the illustrated books of speci¬ 
 men patterns issued by the tile manufacturers 
 will give the intending designer much valuable 
 information as to what is required. 
 
 In preparing designs for tiles it is well to 
 bear in mind that some colours are more costly 
 to manufacture than others. What are called 
 “ plain colours ” are the least expensive—these 
 are Buff, Salmon, Gray, Red, Chocolate, and 
 Black. White costs nearly twice as much, and 
 Blue and Green nearly three times as much. 
 Wherever the “ vitreous colours ” (White, Blue, 
 and Green) are used in a design, the cost of 
 the tiles will be greater than for plain colours. 
 
 The usual size of the hearth is 4 ft. 6 in. x 
 1 ft., and for the grate cheeks, 2 ft. 6 in. x 6 in. 
 The usual sizes for tiles for the hearth are 
 6 x 6, 4^ x 4J, and 3x3. The average grate 
 will take five 6x6 tiles on either side. These 
 are often arranged in a continuous panel 
 design, such as flowers springing from a vase, 
 or a standing figure. 
 
 The smaller manufacturers are most likely 
 to buy from outside designers. One of the 
 larger firms is more likely to depend on its 
 own staff of artists. 
 
 
 
 MM 
 
 rapSgS 
 
 £©31 
 
 J 
 
 
 Design 246. —For Tiles, decorated in Three Colours. 
 
134 
 
 THE CYCLOPAEDIA OF HOME ARTS 
 
 PREPARATION 
 OF WORKING DESIGNS. 
 
 In the preparation of design any mechanical 
 means are permissible which, will help the 
 designer to produce in the quickest and easiest 
 way the combination he seeks. He will use 
 rulers, compasses, geometrical curves, and 
 tracing-paper,’ and any one who attempts to 
 design geometrical patterns for the art trades 
 should be familiar with the use of the scale, 
 the T square, and set square. 
 
 For all purposes the design must be full 
 working size, with every detail of manufacture 
 so plainly indicated that the artisan need never 
 be in doubt as to the intention of the designer. 
 
 Ruled or “Point” Paper is necessary for pre¬ 
 paring a design for a carpet, oilcloth, and such 
 woven fabrics as Nottingham lace curtains, 
 Madras muslin, crepe, “tapestries,” and chenille. 
 It is not employed for designs for wall-paper, 
 woven silk fabrics, or cretonnes and printed 
 fabrics. 
 
 The Colours used in nearly all cases 1 are 
 powder colours, sometimes called “ distemper ” 
 or “ tempora ” ; they are the pigments in nearly 
 their natural state, only finely ground in spirits. 
 All are opaque, and therefore have great 
 density of effect. As they have no size in 
 them, it is necessary to mix them with gum- 
 water ; but care must be taken not to use so 
 much that they will appear glossy when 
 applied to the design. They will, moreover, 
 turn darker if too much gum is used with 
 them. When you have mixed a colour, test it 
 by applying a little to paper and when dry 
 rubbing it slightly with the finger ; if it does 
 not rub off you have used enough gum. Some 
 colours need more gum than others. Carmine 
 will turn black if you use much gum with it; 
 Ultramarine is so absorbent that it needs a 
 good deal. 
 
 1 For tiles and china and pottery decoration generally 
 the design is made with ordinary water-colours. For 
 stained and painted glass the sketch may be either in 
 opaque or transparent colour ; the cartoon is rarely fully 
 coloured. For designs for bookbindings both transparent 
 and opaque water-colours may be used. 
 
 Do not let the colour settle ; otherwise that 
 at the bottom will be of a deeper tint than 
 that first used, so that instead of one shade 
 you will get several. To avoid this, stir the 
 colours frequently with brush or palette-knife. 
 Keep them free from dust. Sometimes, if left 
 undisturbed for several hours, they harden. 
 In that case you will have to regrind them. 
 
 The Palette-knife should be of bone or ivory; 
 steel will affect injuriously colours of metallic 
 origin. 
 
 It is important to produce the result required 
 with as few colours as possible. For Notting¬ 
 ham lace curtains the effect aimed at is 
 imitation by machinery of hand- and pillow- 
 made laces. Flake White only is used, on 
 ruled blue or black paper; yet by this means 
 every detail is reproduced dot for dot and line 
 for line, just as they would appear, with the 
 thread meshes and net effects of the curtain 
 itself. Some of the most beautiful designs of 
 wall-papers are produced in single colour 
 variations of the colour of the paper itself. 
 
 Wall-Paper.—After the design is converted 
 into a working drawing by tracing, transfer it 
 with pencil to a sheet of white water-colour 
 paper large enough to leave a quarter of an 
 inch margin all around. 
 
 Lay the design, after it has been satisfactorily 
 drawn on thin paper, with a sheet of carbon 
 paper between ; let the under side of the design 
 lie on the right side of the water-colour paper, 
 the corners of the two papers being carefully 
 fastened together so as to keep the pattern 
 from losing its position. With a hard pencil 
 follow the lines of the pattern, and when the 
 upper paper is removed the outline will be 
 plainly seen, and you can then trace it more 
 firmly with a lead-pencil. Of course, pencil 
 marks can be erased before the ground is put 
 on, but frequently erasings give the paper a 
 dirty appearance that a neat draughtsman will 
 avoid. Where the design is of flower or leaf 
 forms in their natural shape, a slight variation 
 from the original pattern will not be noticed ; 
 but if conventional forms are transferred in the 
 manner described above, the two papers must 
 be held together as if glued, for the least 
 
BOOK-COVER DESIGNING 
 
 *35 
 
 variation in one figure may make even a greater 
 mistake in another figure, and so on. Faint 
 pencil marks will readily show through the 
 thin wash of a light-coloured ground, but for a 
 dark terra-cotta or brown ground heavier marks 
 will be required. 
 
 Now proceed to the colouring. Remember 
 that the colours, being opaque, cannot be erased 
 after they have been applied to the design. 
 Before you put brush to paper see that each 
 tint is as you need it. 
 
 When the colour is reduced to the consistency 
 of thick cream, transfer it to a saucer. Wet a 
 fine sponge in cold water, wring it nearly dry, 
 and, having dipped it in the tint intended for 
 your ground, go over the paper, including the 
 margin, first with vertical, then with horizontal 
 strokes. A clear, even wash of smooth, velvet¬ 
 like appearance will thus be obtained. The 
 lines of the design will show through the tint. 
 When the ground is thoroughly dry, take a 
 camel-hair brush and go over them. No two 
 wet colours must touch or they will run together. 
 To avoid such a disaster, a space of at least a 
 sixteenth of an inch must be left between the 
 different colours of the pattern. To arrange 
 leaves and flowers so that the different colours 
 will not touch will not be easy for a beginner. 
 
 Carpets.—Ordinarily one-quarter of the full 
 size is a good scale for the sketch ; when there 
 is much detail one-sixth will be a better one. 
 Opaque colour is used in accordance with the 
 directions already given for wall-paper. Make 
 up your mind in advance just how many 
 shades you will use, and in a separate saucer 
 mix enough of each to complete the design. 
 Lay each tint on the paper solidly, uniformly, 
 and distinctly. There must be no mixing of 
 tints on the palette with the brush. If altera¬ 
 tions or corrections are to be made, and it is 
 necessary to lay one colour over another, be 
 sure that the colour is put in solidly and that, 
 in drying, it will match exactly the rest of the 
 tint in other parts of the design. 
 
 vindicate forms by masses of colour only. 
 Each square must be completely filled and only 
 with its own colour—there must be no half¬ 
 squares in the design : each square represents 
 
 the thickness of a thread in the carpet, and 
 there are no half-threads. 
 
 The pencil marks must not show through 
 when the work is finished. Nothing must 
 appear that is not to be literally reproduced in 
 the textile. If outlines are to be part of the 
 design, let them be so indicated that there can 
 be no doubt about the designer’s intention as 
 to their actual thickness. 
 
 Silken Fabrics.—It is not necessary to colour 
 the designs, but if it be found more agreeable 
 to work in colour, there can be no objection to 
 doing so. For furniture and upholstery silks 
 it is usual to draw on white or tinted paper 
 with a lead-pencil or crayon for outline, using 
 the stump (see pp. 3, 16) for half-tone effects 
 (produced in the fabric itself by interweaving 
 the colours of the ground and figures). Half¬ 
 tone effects should be used with much reserve, 
 for the richness of a damask is due principally 
 to the contrast between the (so-called) “ satin ” 
 ground and the close weft of the somewhat 
 duller silk of the ornament. In brocatelle the 
 richness is got by showing a good deal of 
 the raised * satin ” figure and very little of 
 the ground. 
 
 BOOK-COVERS. 
 
 Designs for ordinary “ cloth ” bindings are 
 made in pen and ink on white Bristol board, 
 to be reproduced as a “ photo-zinco ” block 
 in the manner described under “ Drawing for 
 Illustration ” (p. 30). “ Solid ” spaces of black 
 
 may be put in with a brush. 
 
 Fancy shading, and even cross-hatching, 
 unless the lines are clean cut and well apart, 
 must be avoided. The drawing must be bold 
 and the white lines kept well open. The lines 
 should be as distinct as in a mediaeval wood- 
 cut. The design should be as simple as 
 possible. The drawing may be as much larger 
 as you please than the size it is to be repro¬ 
 duced, but be careful that the lines do not come 
 too fine in reduction. 
 
 When the design is to be printed in more 
 than one colour, a separate drawing must be 
 made, and a separate typographic block of it 
 
i 3 6 
 
 THE CYCLOPAEDIA OF HOME ARTS 
 
 be supplied, for that part which each colour 
 (or gold) contributes to the whole design. 
 
 A solid metal electrotype should be made 
 from the “ zinco,” for it will have to stand great 
 pressure. For that part of the design, at least, 
 which has to be reproduced in gold, usually a 
 die is cut in brass, for it has to stand not only 
 great pressure, but also the heat of the blocking 
 
 and for those where a dead gold effect is to be 
 rendered, yellow body colour is used. Some¬ 
 times a few touches of gold paint on the face 
 of the drawing are valuable in expressing the 
 intention of the designer. On the back of the 
 tracing-paper it is best to do only what tinting 
 may be desirable. 
 
 The decoration of the boards, or sides, 
 
 H THE H 
 mVERLEY 
 NOVELS l 
 
 DRYBURGH 
 EDITION I 
 
 VOLXXm 
 
 Design 247.— Book-cover Design (much reduced) for a “Cloth” Binding. 
 
 Reproduced (by permission of Messrs. A. & C. Black) from the original, drawn in pen and ink. The design for the 
 back and for the side of the book are drawn on separate sheets of paper or Bristol board. 
 
 press and much consequent wear and tear. 
 In many cases, brass dies are used altogether; 
 but they are costly, and when feasible the solid 
 electrotype from the “ zinco ” is substituted. 
 
 The drawing of the gilded part of the design, 
 to be rendered by means of the die, is some¬ 
 times done on tracing-paper, yellow water¬ 
 colour being washed on the back, between the 
 outlines, to indicate the parts to be burnished, 
 
 determines that of the back : that is to say, 
 back and sides should be in the same style. 
 If a spray of flowers, or knot of ribbon, or 
 other such free motive be used, it may be 
 carried from the front cover across the back 
 and over on to the other cover. Otherwise 
 only the front board and the back are 
 decorated. A valuable exercise for the student 
 would be to complete design 248 by adapting 
 
BOOK-COVER DESIGNING 
 
 137 
 
 the motive to the back of the cover also, in imagination, rule two vertical lines so as to 
 the manner of Design 247. Designs 243, 244, divide the design into three equal parts, he will 
 245 afford similar interesting exercises. In perceive that the central one will, with a little 
 
 THE 
 
 CYCLOPAEDIA 
 
 OF 
 
 HOME ARTS 
 
 C. ARTHUR 
 PEARSON, 
 LIMD. 
 
 Design 248.— The Hawthorn. Conventional Treatment. 
 Book-cover Decoration, “Cloth” or Leather. 
 
 the case of Design 243, if the reader will turn 
 this book around so that he views the design 
 in its original vertical position, and will, in 
 
 modification, supply the decoration for the back, 
 for which Design 243 furnishes the decoration 
 for the sides. 
 
MISCELLANEOUS. 
 
 RETOUCHING NEGATIVES. 
 
 Artistic training is decidedly an advantage 
 to those who undertake this work. The 
 merely mechanical manipulation is very quickly 
 learned ; but the retoucher must be possessed 
 of good judgment. It is a delicate matter to 
 know just how far to go. With most negatives 
 you must learn to temper justice with mercy ; 
 but with too much of the latter quality you 
 are likely to obliterate the likeness. 
 
 Still, retouching is not simply beautifying j 
 it is first of all a matter of mere justice. The 
 photograph light, when used to obtain a strong 
 likeness, is sure to exaggerate shadows and 
 forms. Retouching simply softens sharp out¬ 
 lines and renders the shadows more transparent. 
 Colour is also sometimes exaggerated. Take, 
 for instance, a child with very red cheeks, and 
 they will be dark in the picture. This would 
 be a disfigurement were it not for the softening 
 effects of the retouching. Indeed, so far does 
 the work of the skilful retoucher go that he 
 can make a good negative out of a very bad 
 one. This latter process is often necessary 
 when it is impossible to get another sitting. 
 
 The negative to be retouched is placed in 
 a wooden frame with a ground-glass back, 
 arranged so as to incline at a convenient angle 
 for the worker, and to let the light shine 
 through—this latter office being assisted by a 
 reflecting mirror beneath the glass. A black 
 cloth, in form of a canopy, excludes the light 
 from coming in about the worker’s head, and 
 all the space at the back except the part of 
 the negative to be retouched is darkened. As 
 you can only see the imperfections of your 
 negative and the places where you are to work 
 by letting the light shine through it, the object 
 of all this preparation is obvious. 
 
 The best retouching pencil is the old-fashioned 
 
 one of real lead, but in graphite the next best 
 is the Faber H.H.H. A kid stump, some 
 mineral paper, or red ground-glass varnish may 
 be also necessary ; but these are only for the 
 use of the experienced worker, and will be 
 referred to again. To prepare the negative so 
 as to get a “ tooth ” for the pencil, put on it a 
 few drops of “ madoleine,” a varnish composed 
 of turpentine and resin, and rub with the 
 finger gently over the surface till it is evenly 
 distributed. 
 
 A beginner usually is given several negatives 
 to work on first, simply to see what he will do. 
 No instructions probably are given to him. 
 Some novices show aptitude at once. To such, 
 suggestions are given by the photographer, who 
 lets them begin on the most unimportant work 
 —for example, smoothing out imperfections of 
 flesh on arms and hands. They are next put 
 on” the face, and so on until they develop 
 the capability of actually changing forms, 
 making hollow cheeks plump, filling out a bit 
 of drapery, and cutting off excrescences, such 
 as angles of hair or dress trimming. 
 
 When the beginner comes to the face, he is 
 first set to removing freckles or other blemishes 
 of the flesh. It is sometimes a good plan to 
 have a proof made from the negative before 
 retouching, so that he may see the direct result 
 of its shortcomings and just where the remedies 
 should be applied. It is a little difficult for him 
 to understand at first that every touch of black 
 he puts on the negative means a touch of white 
 in the print. Only by much practice can he 
 accustom himself to this peculiar way of 
 working. When he sees a line, wrinkle or 
 freckle unpleasantly pronounced in the print, 
 he finds a corresponding white line or spot in 
 the negative, and these he must darken with 
 his pencil. But he must be very careful not to 
 do too much. The little white spot must be 
 very delicately treated. 
 
RESTORATION OF DAMAGED CHINA 139 
 
 Suppose that he is removing a freckle: he 
 must not exceed the space it covers, neither 
 must he make the portion treated more opaque 
 than the parts of the surface around it, else he 
 will have white spots in the print. You see 
 the mere removal of skin blemishes calls for 
 care and discrimination. 
 
 Now we come to the lines in the face, and 
 here is where the nicest judgment is to be used, 
 and the mechanical gives way to artistic 
 instincts. Freckles and other defects of the 
 flesh are the only things in the face that should 
 be absolutely removed ; lines and wrinkles 
 ought never to be entirely eradicated, else 
 much of the character of the likeness will be 
 lost. They are at most only to be very much 
 softened, so as sometimes to leave only the 
 slightest indications. One should begin with 
 the forehead and the lines about the eyes, but 
 leave the mouth alone. That is the one feature 
 that will bear no trifling with. The likeness 
 lies in the mouth. Let your friend put on a 
 wig or spectacles, or in any way change the 
 upper part of his face, and he is still your 
 friend ; but let him, if he can, in any way 
 disguise his mouth, and you do not recognise 
 him. Fold a piece of paper and lay it under 
 your upper lip, and notice how instantly it 
 changes your face. 
 
 A retoucher should have some knowledge of 
 light and shade in pictures. He should know 
 something of the value of a high light or a mass 
 of dark, and should note carefully how the 
 light has fallen on the sitter, also whether it is 
 a direct light or a reflected one. This know¬ 
 ledge is especially necessary where he is to 
 supply lights that are entirely lacking in the 
 negative. Suppose he finds that his print is 
 flat and tame. Clearly the way to improve it 
 is to put in some lights here and there. Perhaps 
 the hair may need a few sharp lines, care being 
 taken to follow the curves of the locks; or the 
 modelling of the face may be strengthened by 
 a delicate lightening of the prominent portions. 
 Accessories, such as drapery or furniture, 
 often need little skilful lights to give them 
 character or to add to the general effect of 
 the composition. 
 
 RESTORATION OF DAMAGED 
 CHINA. 
 
 To restore broken china not merely by sticking 
 together the fragments, but by substituting 
 missing portions, is quite within the abilities of 
 the amateur; the work entails little skill or 
 expense, and success in it is chiefly a matter of 
 patience. 
 
 No matter how clean the fragments appear 
 to be, they should be well cleansed with soap 
 and tepid water; in cases where they are 
 obviously greasy and dirty, the pieces should 
 be soaked for some hours in a solution of 
 potash. After being rinsed in clean water, let 
 them be dried thoroughly, remembering that 
 as earthenware, being more porous, holds much 
 more water than porcelain, so it dries more 
 slowly. It is always best, if possible, to repair 
 a breakage immediately it has taken place, 
 while the edges of the fractured parts are sharp 
 and unchipped. If these are allowed to stay a 
 long time, they are almost sure to get chipped, 
 and so the joint will fit less closely, and the 
 restoration be not only far more difficult, but 
 show a much less neat result. 
 
 For trifling articles, small plates and the like, 
 cement may be sufficient to impart the re¬ 
 quired strength ; but for heavier pieces rivets 
 are absolutely necessary. It is a task of no 
 little skill to insert these so that they are not 
 visible until the article is examined closely. 
 For a dish it is possible, of course, to insert 
 them at the back, so that they are not apparent 
 until it is turned over ; but for vases, jugs, and 
 many other articles, it is almost impossible to 
 fix them from the inside. With regard to the 
 best cement, it is hard to single out any for 
 special praise, but gum lac preparations should 
 not be employed, even when allied with rivets, 
 for heavy pieces. Silicate of potash cements, 
 excellent as they are for glass, should not be 
 used for pottery. 
 
 It is well to remember that all cements 
 lose much of their power when applied in 
 damp weather, unless special precautions are 
 taken. In any humid climate the mending 
 should be done in a warm room and the frag- 
 
140 
 
 THE CYCLOPAEDIA OF HOME ARTS 
 
 ments heated in an oven or warmed separately 
 over the flame of a spirit lamp before the 
 cement is put upon them. The bottle contain¬ 
 ing the cement itself should be kept standing 
 in a jar of warm water at one temperature 
 while it is in use. 
 
 When a piece is much shattered, it is often 
 impossible to build it up at one operation ; for 
 instance, a precious “ six-mark ” cup of old 
 blue and white egg-shell porcelain was several 
 days in progress. First, some of the tiny 
 fragments were fitted to each other, then by 
 
 Fig. 299.—The Restoration of Damaged China 
 or Pottery. 
 
 degrees more were added, course by course as 
 it were, until the sides of the cup were built 
 up. Before adding a broken piece, it is a good 
 plan to tilt the vase or whatever the article 
 may be, so that, speaking roughly, the loose 
 piece would balance itself in place even without 
 the aid of cement. This is hard to describe; 
 but supposing an outstretched hand has been 
 broken off a statuette, it is obvious that if 
 merely stuck on while the figure was upright 
 on its base, the weight of the hand would help 
 to open the joint. Now, the closer the pressure 
 while the cement is setting, the better. There¬ 
 fore if the figure be laid on its back and 
 
 propped up until the stump of the arm is so 
 level that the hand may be balanced upon it, 
 it is evident that the weight of the broken 
 fragment will help to press the joint firmly 
 together. This is the principle to be followed 
 throughout the operation. After all the pieces 
 are reunited, any fissures that may be apparent, 
 owing to the chipped edges of the fragments, 
 should be filled up with a small quantity of 
 the finest plaster, made into a paste with 
 water. 
 
 When the breakage leaves such results as 
 those indicated in figs. 301 and 302, the frag¬ 
 ments may be further supported by a wire 
 inserted as the illustrations indicate. Holes 
 must be pierced in the ware to affix this 
 wire, but they need not pass right through. 
 For drilling, an ordinary centre-bit tool will 
 often be found sufficient; but when the material 
 is very hard, the end of the drill should be 
 kept moist with spirits of turpentine. Use 
 only copper or galvanised iron wire ; ordinary 
 iron wire will rust, and so should never be 
 employed. Secure the ends of the wire with 
 gum lac. The loose gum lac is stronger than 
 the sort prepared in sticks. 
 
 lo restore the handle of a jug, insert wire as 
 shown in fig. 302, and build up the handle 
 around it; the wire should be secured very 
 firmly before the plaster is moulded into shape. 
 If there are no pieces missing, the wire should 
 still be used in sections where it can possibly 
 be inserted. For a larger handle, use two 
 wires and lace them together, until a sort of 
 lattice girder is made, on which build up the 
 the new handle. For large dishes a somewhat 
 similar course may be followed. Fig. 299 shows . 
 how such a framework should be made. For a 
 paste to restore missing portions, take some 
 Spanish white in powder, mix it with strong 
 gum-arabic upon a piece of glass with a palette 
 knife. To make it very hard and durable, 
 temper it with a little alum solution. After 
 it is dry scrape off superfluous portions and 
 polish with glass paper. 
 
 For restoring the colour upon portions built 
 up of new material, water colours should alone 
 be used. Having filled in the missing parts 
 
‘EXTRA ILLUSTRATING,” OR “GRANGERISING 
 
 with plaster of Paris or with the paste just 
 described, allow them to dry and size them 
 with gelatine. Give two coats, and let the first 
 be quite dry before applying the second. Gum 
 
 >A 
 
 Fig. 300.—The Restoration of Damaged China 
 or Pottery. 
 
 water or starch may be used in place of the 
 gelatine. 
 
 To copy the colours of the original, squeeze 
 out some moist water colours upon a palette 
 and mix them with a palette knife until the 
 ground colour is matched; then add a coat of 
 this and leave it to dry. If the colour is not 
 quite right—it often changes in drying—add 
 another until the match is perfect. To restore 
 the decoration, if the pattern is a repeating one 
 — as in fig. 192, for example—it will suffice to 
 copy with a pencil the portion between the 
 dotted line. Trace the design, whatever it be, 
 
 Figs. 301, 302.—The Restoration of Damaged China 
 or Pottery. 
 
 very carefully, and then, placing the pencilled 
 side on the place, retrace it with a hard pencil; 
 this will transfer a faint but clear outline to 
 the plaster. Avoid any false pencilled lines, as 
 
 I4i 
 
 they are difficult to remove. Fill up the design 
 with water-colours of the right tints. If gold 
 is needed, use only the very best, prepared in 
 shells ; and if silver be required, employ only 
 aluminium of the best quality. 
 
 Finally, to impart the high glaze to the new 
 portions, apply a coat of the best Sohnee 
 varnish, and when this has dried add one or 
 two others, until the surface has acquired the 
 desired polish. The effect of articles so 
 mended depends entirely on the patience and 
 neatness of each step in the process, and when 
 carefully done with well-matched colours is 
 hardly noticeable. These directions through¬ 
 out are intended to refer to valuable show 
 pieces only, and must not be held to apply to 
 tableware or articles in actual use. 
 
 “ EXTRA ILLUSTRATING,” OR 
 “ GRANGERISING.” 
 
 “ Extra illustrating,” as the term is used by 
 collectors, means gathering portraits of the 
 persons and views of the places mentioned in 
 any given book, and having the book hand¬ 
 somely rebound, with each portrait and view 
 placed opposite the page where it is mentioned. 
 Drawings, water-colours, prints or photographs, 
 autographs—indeed, all things of the kind that 
 pertain to any person or incident mentioned 
 in the book—have a claim to a place in it. The 
 pastime is fascinating and pleasurable, for 
 pleasure consists not so much in the acquisition 
 of a desired object as in the pursuit of it, and 
 book illustrating is a constant pursuit of coveted 
 prints. It is, moreover, instructive, because the 
 collector makes himself acquainted with the 
 history of the persons mentioned in the book 
 he is illustrating, which leads him to read other 
 books, and in time he becomes thoroughly 
 conversant with the history of the period of 
 which his book treats. The hobby is closely 
 allied to “ bibliomania,” and is generally in¬ 
 dulged in by persons who have fine libraries. . 
 
 As there are books and books, so are there 
 illustrators and illustrators. One man will be 
 
142 
 
 THE CYCLOPAEDIA OF HOME ARTS 
 
 satisfied with the work of a professional illus¬ 
 trator, to whom he will send a volume to be 
 thus interleaved ; another will gather his illus¬ 
 trations from many sources and select such as 
 his own taste decrees fit; another will embellish 
 the work with numerous fancy head and tail 
 pieces appropriate to the subject; and yet 
 another—and happiest is he—who, with ready 
 pen, pencil, and brush, can add a copy of some 
 portrait yet unengraved or the sketch of a 
 locality still unlimned. How it makes a brother- 
 collector’s mouth water and his fingers itch to 
 see such within the leaves of another’s book, 
 which he, too, is illustrating ! 
 
 One illustrator will be satisfied to have his 
 print, autograph, or letter in any state, merely 
 because he has it on the list, and once obtained 
 that particular item can be stricken off; 
 another may buy in succession a dozen im¬ 
 pressions of one desired print, and yet keep on 
 the look-out until the volume is finally bound 
 for a still better impression of it. 
 
 In London in 1769 appeared the first edition, 
 2 vols., 4to, of a book which was the immediate 
 forerunner of all books illustrated by inter¬ 
 leaving. Its title, sufficiently comprehensive, 
 was 
 
 “Biographical History of England from Egbert 
 the Great to the Revolution ; consisting of charac¬ 
 ters disposed in different Classes and adapted to a 
 Methodical Catalogue of Engraved British Heads. In¬ 
 tended as an essay toward reducing our Biographies to 
 a System, and a help to the knowledge of Portraits; with 
 a variety of Anecdotes and Memoirs of a great number of 
 persons, not to be found in any other ‘ Biographical 
 Work.”’ 
 
 The preface also speaks of the utility of a 
 collection of English portraits to supply the 
 defects and answer the various purposes of 
 medals. 
 
 The author was the Reverend Dr. James 
 Granger, and from him this particular method 
 of illustrating takes its name. Living from 
 1723 to 1776, he was educated at Oxford, but 
 left without taking his degree, and upon 
 entering into holy orders was presented to the 
 vicarage and living of Shiplake, Oxfordshire. 
 In the dedication of his book to Horace 
 
 Walpole he states that his “ name and person 
 were known to few at the time of publication, 
 as he had the good fortune to retire early to 
 
 independence, obscurity, and content. 
 
 If he had an ambition for anything it was to 
 be an honest man and a good parish priest.” 
 
 Immediately on the publication of his book 
 the leaven began to work. “ Five shillings,” 
 says Fitzgerald, “ had been considered by 
 collectors a good price for any English portrait, 
 but at once books with portraits rose in price 
 to five times their original value, and few could 
 be found unmutilated. 
 
 Both pompous Dibdin and genial Burton, 
 who were book-lovers of the same degree, but 
 who differed in kind, were bitter enemies of 
 Grangerising, and ridiculed the practice, giving 
 ludicrous examples of book illustrating run 
 mad, the one showing how the first two or three 
 verses of the Bible might be illustrated, the 
 latter taking the first verse alone of “ How doth 
 the little busy bee.” Burton looked upon it as 
 sheer murder—the tearing out the vitals of a 
 friend ; and we can imagine the name he would 
 have given the Grangerites had he been living 
 to-day. 
 
 But we trust that no one who becomes a 
 book “ illustrator ” through reading this article 
 will mutilate a really rare or valuable book. 
 
 In selecting a book to interleave, you may 
 either fear being too ambitious, and obtain 
 “ just a little one to begin with ” ; or you may 
 start on some historical work, city, county, or 
 national, and continue making volumes out of 
 it indefinitely. 
 
 How to split Paper.—Every book “illustrator” 
 should know that seemingly impossible thing 
 —how to split a piece of paper. 
 
 It is a very simple matter, and it is said that 
 when it was first discovered in England it was 
 applied so successfully for duplicating bank¬ 
 notes that the bank authorities were driven to 
 adopt a special paper that would baffle all 
 attempts of the sort. For the innocent purpose 
 of removing the printed matter that so often 
 backs a fine impression of a woodcut or a 
 “process” block the device is invaluable, and 
 the process is not a complicated one. Given 
 
TAXIDERMY 
 
 practice, patience, and pluck, a satisfactory 
 result is certain. 
 
 Having selected the print you wish to detach 
 —which in the first trial should be a worthless 
 one and of small size—trim the margin to a 
 half-inch all round the impression. This is 
 supposing the whole print is about the size of 
 a cabinet photograph. Then have ready some 
 common wheat-flour paste, newly made—which 
 is a very important point, as paste even a day 
 old is apt to spoil the whole operation. Take 
 then two stout pieces of firm linen, muslin, or 
 similar material, a little larger than the print. 
 This should be unwashed stuff—the sort used 
 for rolling window blinds answers admirably. 
 Whatever is chosen must be smooth, firm, and 
 strong. Paste a piece of the stuff on each side 
 of the print. Leave them to dry under pressure, 
 and when nearly set, but not rigid and com¬ 
 pletely dry, pull the two surfaces asunder with 
 a firm and very even force. Herein lies the 
 whole art of the process, and here also comes 
 failure at first, as the print will either refuse to 
 start splitting, and you but peel off one surface 
 of texture, or else it begins well and tears 
 instead of separating into layers before the 
 whole surface is split. 
 
 When you find that the sheet so treated has 
 behaved satisfactorily, and that each piece of 
 linen has a film of paper intact adhering to it, 
 take the one you wish to preserve and soak it 
 in water. Then lift the tender film very gently 
 and mount it with starch upon a suitable piece 
 of cardboard. When mounted, wash all the 
 paste off the right side of the print with a 
 camel’s-hair brush dipped in water. Do this 
 very thoroughly, and then leave the whole to 
 dry under pressure, and the result will astonish 
 all who see it. The film thus gained looks like 
 what the printsellers call an “ India proof”— 
 i.e. y a proof printed on India paper. It is so 
 transparent that if, without margin, it is 
 mounted on polished white wood it looks like a 
 transfer picture. Experts at the trick can treat 
 a print of any size in this way with perfect suc¬ 
 cess, and transfer from an illustrated journal, 
 that otherwise would probably be thrown away, 
 a fine impression well worth framing. 
 
 r 43 
 
 TAXIDERMY. 
 
 I. SKINNING AND PREPARING. 
 
 As an art, Taxidermy is strictly of modern 
 inception. The Greek words which make 
 the designation—meaning “ arrangement ” and 
 “ skin’’—express, collectively, its essential 
 nature: the arrangement or manipulation of 
 the skins of animals ; practically, the removal 
 and preservation of skins, which are either 
 placed, unmounted, in cabinets, for examina¬ 
 tion and study, or subjected to the more 
 complex arrangement of stuffing, mounting, 
 and adjusting, to counterfeit as near as possible 
 nature’s likeness, and to express the character¬ 
 istic habits of the individual. 
 
 Taxidermy calls for peculiar abilities. To 
 be eminent in the art one must possess such 
 faculties as will naturally place him higher. 
 He must have the artistic faculty. It is not 
 enough that he perform the simple mechanical 
 manipulations : many such are known all over 
 the land, and many such produce pleasing 
 work. But there are higher possibilities. An 
 eye for modelling is requisite. After the skin 
 is preserved and ready for mounting, the more 
 the operator is possessed of the faculty that 
 makes the sculptor, the nearer he will succeed 
 in modelling skins that express the charac¬ 
 teristic habits of position. The details of the 
 best work are considerable: the eyes are care¬ 
 fully made in glass, and the characteristic 
 shapes of pupils and canthi and colour of 
 irides are shown. 
 
 It is quite within the reach of the amateur 
 operator to become skilled in the various mani¬ 
 pulations required, and an ordinary amount of 
 mechanical ability will prove sufficient for very 
 pleasing results. Select a large bird or small 
 quadruped for practice—a hen, we will say. 
 The few tools required are readily suggested 
 and easily procured. Any convenient knife, 
 something after the shape of a paper-cutter or 
 scalpel; a pair of stout, short-bladed shears ; 
 a lighter pair; forceps, which are exactly like 
 those used by surgeons for dissecting; and a 
 longer pair, with handles. The tools are shown 
 in fig. 303. One might add to them a large 
 
144 
 
 THE CYCLOPAEDIA OF HOME ARTS 
 
 skinning-knife, a pair of tow pliers, and a large 
 and a small file. 
 
 Having the bird in hand, proceed to plug 
 with cotton all holes made by shot, and the 
 natural openings, to prevent blood or injecta 
 from soiling the plumage. 
 
 In the field, when specimens are reserved for 
 mounting, they should be placed in a cone of 
 paper, head downward, the tail being neatly 
 covered by folding a portion over it. We now 
 
 Fig. 303. —Tools and Materials used in Taxidermy. 
 
 place the bird upon the table, and separate the 
 feathers, when they are sparsely set, in a line 
 with the breast-bone. Make an incision 
 through the skin only ; have at hand a dish 
 of oatmeal or plaster of Paris to apply freely 
 to grease or blood, that the feathers may not 
 be soiled. The edges of the incision are apt 
 to curl inwards ; by treating them thoroughly 
 with the meal they are protected from this 
 evil. 
 
 The incision having been completed from 
 the lower end of the breast-bone to the vent, 
 careful manipulation with the forceps and 
 fingers, and at times with the back of the 
 knife, will suffice to remove the skin on both 
 sides as low down as convenient. Place the 
 thumb and forefinger of your right hand over 
 the skin of the breast, press downward, and 
 you will expose the whole breast to the neck, 
 
 as seen in fig. 304. Now thrust a stout hook 
 through the breast, beneath the “ merry¬ 
 thought,” or in any position to sustain a strong 
 pull; suspend the hooked body from above; as 
 you can then the more conveniently handle it. 
 Now sever the neck, as seen in fig. 305. Lay 
 hold of a wing, pushing down, at the same 
 time opening a place under the wing by aid of 
 your fingers, in which place your scissors, and 
 cut off at the shoulder, as in fig. 306. 
 
 Having cut off both wings, much care is 
 requisite in separating the skin from the back. 
 Here is the most delicate work ; use great care 
 as the loins are reached. Now take hold of a 
 leg at the lower joint and press the skin down 
 carefully with the fingers; insert the scissors 
 at the joint (the knee, properly), and sever as in 
 fig. 307. 
 
 Carefully force down the skin to the base of 
 the tail and cut off; the oil sac and adhering 
 flesh should be removed also. The legs may 
 now be stripped of all flesh and fat—indeed, 
 all fat should be carefully left on all parts of 
 the body, so that the skin may be as free as 
 possible from it. The wings may now be 
 stripped, care being taken to use the fingers in 
 forcing down the skin. Remove the flesh from 
 the bones of the wings and legs. Do not 
 separate the shafts of the feathers—which are 
 now seen adhering to the bone. In large birds 
 the wing may be conveniently opened from the 
 outside; an incision made on the under side 
 will allow room to remove the flesh. 
 
 Having now removed the body, and properly 
 cleaned the wing and leg bones, we may very 
 easily strip the skin down from the neck. 
 Before doing this, introduce the hook into the 
 severed end of the neck, and suspend the skin, 
 head downward, from above. The skin will 
 leave the neck very readily, but as soon as the 
 skull is reached manoeuvre carefully. Patient 
 manipulating with the fingers will remove the 
 skin from nearly all birds’ heads. Owls and a 
 few other birds will require a slit made in the 
 neck at this point, which may be sewed up 
 before the skin is turned. The ear openings 
 are first encountered ; the membrane ^which 
 covers them should be carefully pushed off the 
 
TAXIDERMY 
 
 skull by the finger-nail, or a blunt stick ; little 
 cutting is required. Then the eyes: carefully 
 
 Fig. 304.—Skinning and Preparing the Bird. 
 
 push the skin away until the eye-socket is 
 completely exposed. The membrane which 
 holds the skin in place around the eyes should 
 
 Fig. 305. —Skinning and Preparing the Bird. 
 
 be separated so skilfully as to leave the eyelids 
 of the skin perfect in their borders. Push the 
 
 *45 
 
 skin farther down towards the bill, and then 
 remove the eyes and all flesh that can be 
 separated from the skull. Continue the skin¬ 
 ning to the base of the bill. The under jaw 
 should be denuded of its flesh; the tongue and 
 all soft parts in this region removed. The 
 base of the skull should now be cut through, 
 removing a part of the roof of the mouth ; the 
 brain is now entirely removed, and all other 
 soft parts. 
 
 The preserving process is now in order. 
 Have a wide-mouthed bottle of pure arsenic, 
 which should be plainly labelled POISON !—and 
 kept securely stopped, and away from all other 
 
 Fig. 306. —Skinning and Preparing the Bird. 
 
 articles. With a common painter’s “sash tool” 
 or brush apply the dry arsenic freely to every 
 fleshy part that can be reached. Begin with 
 the head. Apply the arsenic to the eye-sockets 
 very freely, to the interior of skull, and then 
 fill these parts with cotton. The mouth and 
 jaws will require a thorough poisoning. Apply 
 the poison freely to every other part, working 
 it well into the wing portions and into the 
 legs. Arsenic is not deleterious, used in a 
 proper manner; it is deadly poison taken into 
 the stomach. The worst that happens to those 
 who use great quantities, or handle it with 
 
 10 
 
THE CYCLOPAEDIA OF HOME ARTS 
 
 146 
 
 abraded or cut hands, is a slight soreness in the 
 more tender parts, as under the nails; this is 
 
 avoided very con¬ 
 siderably by oiling 
 the hands, or 
 washing them in 
 glycerine. The 
 arsenical soaps are 
 prized by some, 
 but we much prefer 
 the dry powder, as 
 being more con¬ 
 venient and more 
 efficient. 
 
 The legs of the 
 bird and the bill 
 should be var¬ 
 nished, to preserve 
 them from the at¬ 
 tacks of insects. 
 
 The skin is now 
 ready to turn into 
 its proper shape, 
 be smoothed into 
 to be only 
 
 Fig. 
 
 307.— Skinning and Pre¬ 
 paring the Bird. 
 
 used 
 
 when the feathers must 
 place, and if the skin is 
 for examination or study, it 
 may be filled out with cotton 
 and arranged in the shape seen 
 in fig. 309. Before this is done 
 the wing bones should be tied, 
 on the inside, to each other, 
 leaving a space between the 
 ends of about an inch—or suf¬ 
 ficient to allow the wings to 
 assume a natural position. The 
 leg bones should be wrapped 
 with cotton. To make a neat 
 cabinet specimen, like the fig. 309, a piece of 
 pine wood is wrapped with tow or cotton, and 
 the upper end passed on to the skull ; the 
 lower end projects a little to allow the specimen 
 to be handled without disturbing the plumage. 
 The skin is now neatly brought into shape 
 and sewed. 
 
 White feathers that are soiled may be cleansed 
 by washing in soap and water, and repeatedly 
 dried off by sprinkling with plaster of Paris. 
 
 To skin and preserve a quadruped the pro¬ 
 
 cesses are so similar that any one having 
 sufficient skill to do the one may successfully 
 cope with the other. 
 
 II. MOUNTING. 
 
 Our specimen is now neatly filled with a tem¬ 
 porary body, the skin having been thoroughly 
 poisoned and preserved, and made pretty surely 
 proof against the attack of insects, and not 
 subject to decomposition ; this indefinitely, if 
 proper manipulation is observed. 
 
 In this condition it is useful for study, and 
 is in the required state for the cabinet. Should 
 the specimen, however, at any time, be selected 
 to “ set up,” the following course may be 
 followed :— 
 
 In a sheet of cotton batting closely envelop 
 the bird or quadruped, allowing several folds 
 to cover it. A coarse cloth, well saturated with 
 clean water, is. wrapped loosely around the 
 cotton, and the whole set aside for a few hours. 
 At the expiration of twenty-four hours the 
 smaller skins are softened sufficiently, and will 
 be found to be much in the same condition as 
 that of a freshly-skinned animal. The moisture 
 
 Fig. 308.— Mounting the Bird. 
 
 The parts a, a, a, should be sewn through, to form on each side a depression suitable 
 for the fitting in of the wing bones when the body is in place. 
 
 has penetrated to all parts, and the roots of 
 feathers or hair are so pliable that the exterior 
 
 Fig. 309.— Mounting the Bird. 
 
 Body. 
 
 The Completed 
 
TAXIDERMY 
 
 H7 
 
 portions may be easily smoothed and returned 
 to their proper places. 
 
 We now arrive at an important division of 
 our subject—that which calls for the “counterfeit 
 presentment ” of life, which will be more or 
 less successful as we possess skill in manipula¬ 
 tion, and an eye to reassemble the parts after 
 nature’s pattern. 
 
 Naturally we would select a fresh object, one 
 that we may skin and mount at one sitting, 
 before the parts become dried. The processes 
 are much the same in each case. Our specimen 
 in hand, and thoroughly softened, we remove 
 the temporary stuffing. With soft hay or 
 moss form a body—cotton is not used for this, 
 as the necessary wires cannot be thrust into 
 such a body easily—wrap tightly with “ shoe 
 thread,” or similar, using the thread very freely, 
 and carefully moulding the body, as we pro¬ 
 ceed, to resemble the natural body. In case of 
 having a fresh specimen, the body should 
 always be before us until this process is 
 finished. In fig. 308 the parts a a a should be 
 sewn through to form on each side a depression 
 suitable for the fitting in of the wing bones 
 when the body is in place. 
 
 An iron wire sharpened at each end is thrust 
 along the back, and clinched at the large end 
 of the body, the opposite or anterior end to 
 project a little, upon which we now wind 
 cotton or soft tow, to form the neck, all being 
 tightly secured with thread, and moulded neatly 
 to match the natural neck in size. Fig. 309 
 shows the completed body. 
 
 The skin is now laid out, and the sharpened 
 neck wire thrust through the skull, and out 
 from the forehead a little, to give room to 
 adjust the neck at proper length. The wing 
 bones are tied together, a small space being 
 left between the ends, about a half-inch for 
 small birds. The skin is now brought carefully 
 over the artificial body, and the feathers neatly 
 adjusted. If there are any soiled feathers, as 
 is frequently the case, they should be cleaned 
 before the process goes further ; this is done 
 by washing in soapy water and freely absorb¬ 
 ing with plaster of Paris powder, the latter 
 to be repeatedly alternated with washings, 
 
 and at last used until the feathers are entirely 
 dry. 
 
 Wires are now prepared for supporting the 
 body. Two iron wires, the same in size as 
 used for the body, are sharpened and thrust 
 through the feet and legs, and into the body, 
 following along the leg bones, upon which 
 should be wound cotton or tow to fill out the 
 thighs. The sharpened end of one of the wires 
 is seen in fig. 310 near the breast, where it is 
 turned in to stiffen the hold upon the body. 
 A better way is to clinch the two wires at the 
 same point, and turn them both into the breast 
 The skin is now adjusted around the body, and 
 the parts brought together in front. With a 
 needle and thread the edges of the incision are 
 carefully secured ; the skin being tender, some 
 care is requisite in this operation. If the body 
 is correctly proportioned to the skin it will be 
 readily accomplished. We have now a structure 
 sufficiently complete to support itself stiffly 
 when the leg wires are made fast. 
 
 A stand is prepared, perch or flat disk, 
 according to the nature of the bird (some 
 perch habitually, while others always alight 
 and progress upon the flat ground). The leg 
 wires are now passed through the stand and 
 the bird brought up into shape as in fig. 310. 
 You will readily perceive that the wires of the 
 neck and legs are susceptible of considerable 
 flexion, and in the judicious manipulation of 
 this framework lies the secret of good taxi¬ 
 dermy. The neck may be bent in any position 
 you may choose that corresponds to nature. 
 The feathers require adjusting, the wings to be 
 placed, and the whole body carefully smoothed. 
 In these operations the surgeon’s forceps will 
 be found useful. The wings require pinning ; 
 for this purpose iron wires sharpened are useful, 
 the ends left protruding sufficiently to catch 
 the loops of thread which will be wound over 
 the feathers as a last operation, as in fig. 311. 
 A bit of wire looped over the tail compresses 
 and spreads the feathers neatly. After the 
 bird is fairly mounted in this manner, it is 
 usually necessary to examine the throat and 
 eye sockets and supply the needful stuffing of 
 cotton to fill out properly those parts. The 
 
143 
 
 THE CYCLOPAEDIA OF HOME ARTS 
 
 bill should be wound by a thread to close it, 
 and this, with all other temporary appliances, 
 should be allowed to remain for several days, 
 
 Our specimen is now in the condition of 
 that in fig. 311—well wound with thread, the 
 feathers in place, the tail spread, and the 
 correct position assumed. It is customary 
 to leave the wire projecting out from the skull 
 until the skin is well dried and shrinkage has 
 ceased; it may then be cut even with the 
 skull and the part carefully concealed by 
 feathers. 
 
 We assume that a specimen prepared in the 
 thorough manner herein described will remain 
 indefinitely unharmed by moths or other 
 noxious insects. The arsenic powder carefully 
 introduced into every part of the fleshy portion 
 is sufficient. It only remains to say that it 
 is always difficult to poison the internal 
 portions of the legs and bill, therefore we 
 apply a solution of corrosive sublimate to 
 those parts, and eventually varnish them ; 
 this done, it is pretty safe to say that the 
 specimen will remain intact 
 
 Fig. 31a—T he Bird Brought up into Shape on 
 the Stand. 
 
 The leg wires are passed through the stand. Like those ot 
 the neck, they are susceptible of considerable flexion, and 
 in the judicious manipulation of this framework lies the 
 secret of good taxidermy. 
 
 when the parts will be thoroughly dry. The 
 eyes are replaced by excellent glass substitutes, 
 which are readily obtained. 1 Most small glass 
 eyes are provided with wires, which may be 
 plunged into the stuffing. Hence it will be 
 well to have the stuffing of the eyes of the 
 same material as that of the body, as the wire 
 does not easily penetrate cotton. The eyelids 
 are carefully drawn around the glass eyes 
 sufficiently to hold them in place. Eyes are 
 made to imitate all known forms, and the 
 various colours of irides are well executed. 
 Among the larger kinds, those required for 
 quadrupeds, great excellence is attained ; the 
 peculiar forms and positions of the pupil are 
 observed. 
 
 1 These, as well as all the tools and appliances, can be 
 had of Mr. E. H. Meek, 56, Brompton Road, S.W. 
 
 Fig. 311.—Mounting the Bird. The Last Operation. 
 
 The feathers require adjusting, the wings to be placed, and 
 the whole body carefully smoothed. 
 
 We can add one very important item of 
 interest. In the very common event of the 
 reader having specimens of skins that have 
 
TAXIDERMY 
 
 not been properly poisoned, as many that come 
 from abroad are not, it is desirable, should 
 the skins show evidence of the presence of 
 moths, or anthrinae, or their eggs, to rid them 
 at once of the pests. Dip the skins into pure 
 naphtha, and, after a thorough soaking, dry 
 very quickly by steam. The evaporation is 
 so rapid, and the naphtha so clean, no injury 
 whatever is done to the plumage ; neither to 
 the colour nor texture. 
 
 III. INSECT TAXIDERMY. 
 
 At the Museum of Natural History one may 
 see beautiful work of this kind, each species 
 of insect being illustrated by a prepared 
 specimen of the various phases in which it 
 appears, from the egg to the perfect form. 
 The plant on which the insect feeds is arranged 
 with the specimens, together with the nest 
 that each makes. The worms are emptied 
 of their contents and preserved with much 
 care, showing the various stages; many of 
 them are of brilliant colours, and retain a very 
 natural appearance. The cocoons and the 
 silken or other products are also shown. In 
 some instances spiders’ nests prove to be made 
 up of tough and beautiful silk. 
 
 The art is within the reach of the young 
 amateur, and a tolerable exercise of ingenuity 
 will produce very interesting results. The 
 principal manipulation is with the worms or 
 larvae. You wish to preserve, for example, 
 one of the great green worms that you find 
 eating your grape-vine. Make an incision 
 across the posterior portion, just sufficient to 
 include the end of the alimentary canal ; press 
 the contents of the worm out through the 
 opening, gently, and with special care in the 
 case of the tussock-moth worms and others 
 that have hairy or other appendages. Though 
 seemingly a hazardous thing to do (as respects 
 the integrity of the specimen), yet the most 
 delicate hairy caterpillars may be very success¬ 
 fully emptied of their contents. Indeed, they 
 
 T 49 
 
 are by this process so cleaned internally that, 
 practically, they are skinned, and you have 
 the skin now to deal with. 
 
 Select a good straw, of size proportioned to 
 the specimen ; this is to be used as a blow¬ 
 pipe, and should, therefore, be a whole one, and 
 several inches in length. Introduce the straw 
 carefully within the cut end of the worm, and 
 tie the end around the straw with fine silk. If 
 the operation of squeezing has been successful, 
 it remains to inflate the body for preservation. 
 Prepare a dish of live embers, and over these 
 hold the specimen—using great care in the 
 degree of heat applied. While holding the 
 worm in this way, keep it inflated. The form 
 which the insect is to assume for the cabinet 
 should be considered while this drying process 
 is going on. Some light wooden frame, such 
 as will be readily suggested to the operator, 
 will often be of service to hold the specimen in 
 the proper position. Some worms may require 
 to be curved, or put into a shape characteristic 
 of them while living. Attention to these points 
 will contribute greatly to the value and pleasing 
 appearance of the specimen. The straw, after 
 the drying, is cut off near the body, as it is 
 convenient to allow a small portion to project 
 outside, so that the specimen may be pinned to 
 the cabinet through it, thus avoiding the injury 
 that results from passing the pin through the 
 body. 
 
 The specimen is now complete, unless we 
 choose to adopt some method of poisoning it. 
 Corrosive sublimate, which is sometimes used, 
 is likely to injure the colours. A strong 
 arsenical solution may be applied with a brush, 
 safely, as regards the colours. Caterpillar: 
 prepared in this manner preserve their colour 
 and form nearly perfect, the hairs and other 
 appendages retaining a remarkably natural 
 appearance, which, of course, enhances greatly 
 the beauty and usefulness of an entomological 
 cabinet. 
 
 An extended field is open to any one who 
 may practise this branch of taxidermy. 
 
INDEX. 
 
 A. 
 
 Alum in boiled leather work, Use of, 79. 
 
 American white wood for carving, 34 ; for Pyrogra- 
 vure, 62. 
 
 Anaglypta, or Lincrusta, 85. 
 
 Animals in repousse work, 102. 
 
 Annealing metals for repousse work, 92. 
 
 Applied Design: Preparatory study, 114; natural 
 and conventional ornament, 119 ; the con¬ 
 struction of ornament, 122 ; wall-paper, 127 ; 
 textiles, 129 ; tiles, 133 ; preparation of working 
 designs, 134; book covers, 135. 
 
 Arsenic for taxidermy, 145. 
 
 Axminster carpet, Colours for, 131. 
 
 B. 
 
 Background in stamped leather, Treatment of, 78 ; in 
 repousse work, 101. 
 
 Bench for wood-carving, 35. 
 
 “ Bench bolts,” 36. 
 
 “ Bench screws ” for wood-carving, 35. 
 
 Bent-iron work, 105. 
 
 Birch wood for fret-sawing, 56. 
 
 Blind tooling in bookbinding, 84. 
 
 Blow lamp for repousse work, 95. 
 
 Book-covers, Designing, 135. 
 
 Bookbinding, pyrogravure in leather, 66; Mosaic 
 mode, 81; tooling, 81 ; blind tooling, 84. 
 
 Brass, Sheet, for repousse work, 92. 
 
 Brussels carpet, Colours for, 131. 
 
 Bust, Modelling a, in clay, 18, 19. 
 
 C. 
 
 Carpet designing, 129 ; colours for, 131, 135. 
 
 “ Carving in the flat,” 37. 
 
 Carving, Wood, 32. 
 
 Casts, Plaster, from the clay model, 28 ; from life, 
 31 ; gelatine moulds for, 31. 
 
 Cast, Working from the, 18. 
 
 Cement or pitch-block for repousse work, 95. 
 Chestnut wood for pyrogravure, 62. 
 
 China Clay, Modelling in : Tinted clays, 22 ; to 
 prepare medallions, 23 ; “ slip,” a, 25 ; the wax 
 model, 25 ; tools, 26. 
 
 China, Restoration of Damaged, 139; rivetting, 
 140; paste for, 140; colours for, 141 ; Sohnee 
 varnish for, 141. 
 
 Chip or notch carving, 32. 
 
 Clay Modelling, in— 
 
 Materials and Appliances: 
 
 Lighting, 17; the clay, 17; tools for, 17; to 
 model in relief, 17 ; to preserve the clay, 17. 
 Working from the cast: 
 
 The model, 18 ; modelling a bust, 18 ; makeshift 
 stand, 18 : glue water, 19. 
 
 Working from life : 
 
 Modelling a bust, 19 ; Full-length figure, 20 ; the 
 stand, 20 ; draped figures, 21; proportions, 21; 
 method of measuring, 22. 
 
 Clay model, Plaster casts for the, 28. 
 
 Clay, To preserve, 17 ; modelling in China clay, 22 ; 
 tinted, 22. 
 
 Colours for plaster casts, 31; for Gesso, 28 ; oil for 
 stamped leather work, 78; for Lincrusta, 85 ; 
 tiles, 133 ; in working designs, 134. 
 
 Colours, “Distemper” or “Tempora,” 134 ; for wall¬ 
 paper designs, 135 ; for carpet designs, 135 ; for 
 silken fabrics, 135 ; for damaged china, 141. 
 
 “ Composite clay” for wax modelling, 27. 
 Construction of the ornament, 122. 
 
 Conventional, The, in designing, 120. 
 
 Copper, Sheet, for repousse work, 93. 
 
 Corrosive sublimate for taxidermy, 148. 
 
 Cotton batting for taxidermy, 146. 
 
 Curving wood by steaming, 54. 
 
 Cushion, The, for repousse work, 95. 
 
 D. 
 
 Dado rail, A Gothic, 43. 
 
 Damaged china, Restoration of, 139. 
 
 Design, Applied, in silk manufacture, 114. 
 
 Design, Transferring, for Gesso work, 28; for stamped 
 leather, 77 ; in bookbinding, 84; for etching, 90; 
 in Repousse work, 96 ; applied, 114. 
 
152 
 
 INDEX 
 
 Designs, for wood-carving, 37 ; transferring, 38 ; for 
 edges of shelves, 45 ; diaper, 48 ; to fix for fret¬ 
 work, 56 ; in pyrogravure, 70 ; for bookbinding, 
 84; in Lincrusta, 86 ; geometrical, 1 19 ; to prove 
 a, 126 ; dimensions for wall-paper, 127 ; prepara¬ 
 tion of working, 134; for wall-paper, 134; for 
 carpets, 135; for silken fabrics, 135 ; for book- 
 covers, 135. 
 
 Diaper designs for wood-carving, 48. 
 
 Difficulties in making plaster casts from life, 31. 
 
 Dimensions of design for wall-paper, 129. 
 
 “ Distemper ” or “ Tempora ” colours, 134. 
 
 “ Dragon” design for wood-carving, 37. 
 
 Draped figure in clay modelling, 21. 
 
 Drill for rivetting china, 140. 
 
 “ Drop,” The, in designing, 125. 
 
 Dye-staining pyrogravure, 63. 
 
 E. 
 
 Elm wood for pyrogravure, 62. 
 
 Etching on Metal : To prepare the plate, 90 ; the 
 design, 90 ; the wax, 90 ; the acid, 91. 
 
 “Extra Illustrating” or “Grangerising,” 141. 
 Eyes, Glass, for taxidermy, 148. 
 
 F. 
 
 Figure, Full-length, in clay modelling, 20; draped, 
 21. 
 
 Finishing wood-carving, 34 ; 40. 
 
 “ Flat,” Carving in the, 37. 
 
 Flat chasing, 97. 
 
 Fret-sawing : Its limitations, 56; suitable woods, 56; 
 
 tools, 56 ; fixing the pattern, 56. 
 
 Fretwork in conjunction with wood-carving, 54. 
 Fruit in repousse work, 101. 
 
 Full-length figure in clay modelling, 20. 
 
 G. 
 
 Gelatine moulds for plaster casts, 31. 
 
 Geometrical designs, 119. 
 
 Gesso, Modelling in : Transferring the design, 28 ; 
 preparations of, 28 ; uses of, 28 ; colours for, 28 ; 
 lacquers for, 28. 
 
 Gild leather, To, 77. 
 
 Gilding pyrogravure, 63. 
 
 Glass eyes for taxidermy, 148. 
 
 Glass pyrogravure, 75. 
 
 Glue water for clay modelling, 19. 
 
 Gothic Dado rail, 43. 
 
 “Grangerising” or “ extra illustrating,” 141. 
 
 Grinding carving tools, 36. 
 
 H. 
 
 Hammered Metal : Materials, 92 ; suitable metals, 
 92; annealing, 92; selection of the metal, 92 ; 
 tools and appliances, 93 ; preparations for work, 
 
 95 ; transferring the design, 96; the first attempt, 
 
 96 ; flat chasing, 97 ; raising and modelling, 98 ; 
 finishing, 100; the background, 101 ; textures, 
 101 ; raising from the back, lacquering, 102. 
 
 Hanging shelves, Decoration of, 45. 
 
 Hinges, Saw-pierced, 89. 
 
 “ Holdfast” for wood-carving, 35. 
 
 Holly wood for carving, 34 ; for pyrogravure, 62. 
 How to split paper, 142. 
 
 Human form, The, in repousse work, 101. 
 
 I. 
 
 Imperfections in the plaster cast, to remedy, 30. 
 Insect taxidermy, 149. 
 
 Interior decoration, pyrogravure in, 70. 
 
 K. 
 
 “ Kurfing ” in wood-carving, 40. 
 
 L. 
 
 Lace, designing, 134. 
 
 Lacquering, 103. 
 
 Lacquers for Gesso, 28. 
 
 Lancewood for carving, 51. 
 
 Leather Work— 
 
 Stamping, Gilding, Painting : 
 
 To gild leather, 77; tools and appliances, 77; 
 tracing the design, 77 ; treatment of back¬ 
 ground, 78. 
 
 Boiled Leather Work : 
 
 Use of alum and soft soap, 79; moulding the 
 leather, 79; ornamenting with sheet-metal, 81. 
 Bookbindings : 
 
 Mosaic mode, 81 ; tooling, 81. 
 
 Leather in pyrogravure, 66; for panelling, 72, 77; 
 
 for bookbinding, 66; “stamped,” 77. 
 
 Leather, to gild, 77. 
 
 Leaves in repousse work, 101. 
 
 Life, plaster casts from, 31 ; working from in clay 
 modelling, 19. 
 
 Lighting in clay modelling, 17. 
 
 Lime-wood for carving, 34 ; for pyrogravure, 62. 
 Lincrusta, or Anaglypta Decoration : Advantages 
 of, 85 ; colours for, 85. 
 
 Lustra colours for pyrogravure, 63. 
 
 M. 
 
 “ Madoleine ” for retouching negatives, 138. 
 
 Makeshift stand for clay modelling, 18. 
 
INDEX 
 
 153 
 
 Mallet, rawhide, for repousse work, 93. 
 
 Match and repeat in designing, 125. 
 
 Materials for clay modelling, 17. 
 
 Measuring, method of, in clay modelling, 22. 
 Medallions, to prepare, for China clay modelling, 23. 
 Metal Work : Saw-piercing, 88 ; etching on metal, 
 90; hammered metal, 92; bent- and light 
 wrought-iron work, 105. 
 
 Metals, suitable for repousse work, 92 ; annealing, 
 92 ; selection for repousse work, 92. 
 
 Mica for iron lamp, 113. 
 
 Model, The, in clay modelling, 18; wax, for China 
 clay modelling, 25 ; clay, for plaster casts, 28. 
 Modelling in clay, 17; a bust, 18 ; in China clay, 
 22 ; in Gesso, 28 ; in wax, 27. 
 
 Modelling wax, 27. 
 
 Mosaic mode in bookbinding, 81. 
 
 Moulds, gelatine for plaster casts, 31. 
 
 Mould, use of, in transferring design, 44; in boiled 
 leather work, 79; papier mache for boiled leather 
 work, 80. 
 
 N. 
 
 Naphtha, use of, in taxidermy, 149. 
 
 Natural and conventional ornament, 119. 
 
 Negatives, retouching, 138. 
 
 Nitric acid for etching, 91. 
 
 Notch or chip carving, 32. 
 
 O. 
 
 Oak for fret-sawing, 56 ; for pyrogravure, 62. 
 
 Oil, linseed, for finishing wood-carving, 40. 
 
 Oil colours for stamped leather work, 78. 
 
 Oiling the skin for plaster casts, 31. 
 
 Olive oil, Use of, with plaster casts, 30. 
 
 Ornament, natural and conventional, 119; construc¬ 
 tion of, 122. 
 
 P. 
 
 Palette knife, The, 134. 
 
 Panels, leather, 72, 77. 
 
 Paper, how to split, 142. 
 
 Papier-mache moulds for boiled leather, 80. 
 
 Paste for damaged china, 140. 
 
 Pattern for saw-piercing, The, 88; for wall-paper, 
 127. 
 
 Pattern points for pyrogravure, 61. 
 
 Pear wood for carving, 34. 
 
 Pencil, The, for retouching negatives, 138. 
 
 Pine wood for pyrogi'avure, 62. 
 
 “ Pitch,” The, in designing, 132. 
 
 Pitch block for repousse work, 94. 
 
 Plane wood for carving, 34. 
 
 Plaster Casts— 
 
 From the clay model: 
 
 To make, 30; soap water, use of, 30; olive oil, 
 use of, 30; removing the cast, 30; imperfec¬ 
 tions in the cast, 30. 
 
 From life : 
 
 Difficulties of making, 31 ; must be done 
 quickly, 31 ; oiling the skin, 31; colours for 
 the plaster, 31. 
 
 Gelatine moulds for: 
 
 Their use, 31 ; useful hints for making, 31. 
 Plaster of Paris, Use of, in taxidermy, 146. 
 
 Platinum point for pyrogravure, 61, 64. 
 
 Pliers for bent-iron work, 105. 
 
 “Point” paper, for carpet designing, 132, 134. 
 Pointilloir, The, use of in repousse work, 101. 
 Polishing wood-carving, 34; pyrogravure, 62 ; flat 
 surfaces, 42. 
 
 Preparations of Gesso, 28. 
 
 Proportions, The, in clay modelling, 21. 
 
 Prove a design, To, 126. 
 
 Pyrogravure (or Poker work)— 
 
 Tools and materials : 
 
 Wood, 62 ; polishing, 62 ; varnishing, 63; dye 
 staining, 63 ; gilding and silvering, 63 ; lustra 
 colours, 63 ; substitute for staining, 64. 
 Application of the platinum point: 
 
 A caution, 64. 
 
 On leather : 
 
 Advantages, 66 : suitable articles for, 68. 
 Treatment of some designs : 
 
 In interior decoration, 70 ; glass pyrogravure, 75. 
 
 R. 
 
 Raising and modelling in repousse work, 98. 
 
 Raising from the back in repousse work, 102. 
 
 Raising tools for repousse work, 94. 
 
 Rawhide mallet for repousse work, 93. 
 
 Relief, Clay modelling in, 17. 
 
 Removing the plaster cast, 30. 
 
 “ Repeat,” The, in wall-paper, 128. 
 
 Repousse work, 92. 
 
 Restoration of damaged china, 139. 
 
 Retouching negatives, 138 : the pencil, 138 ; “ mado- 
 leine,” 138. 
 
 Ring tools for repousse work, 94. 
 
 Rivets for damaged china, 140. 
 
 Ruled or “ Point” paper, Use of, in designing, 134. 
 
 S. 
 
 Sand, Hot, a substitute for staining, 64. 
 
 Saw-piercing : Objects suitable for, 88 ; the pattern, 
 88 ; sheet-metal, 88 ; hinges, 89. 
 
 Shears for bent-iron work, 165. 
 
154 
 
 INDEX 
 
 Sheet metal, Use of, in boiled leather work, 81 j for 
 saw-piercing, 88. 
 
 Shelves, Designs for edges of, 45 ; decoration of 
 hanging, 45. 
 
 Silk manufacture, Applied design in, 114; colours for 
 designs, 135. 
 
 Silvering pyrogravure, 63. 
 
 Skin, Oiling the, for plaster cast, 31. 
 
 Skinning for taxidermy, 143. 
 
 “ Slip, A,” for China clay modelling, 25. 
 
 Snarling iron, Use of, 102. 
 
 Soap water, Use of, with plaster casts, 30. 
 
 Soft soap in boiled leather work, Use of, 79. 
 
 Sohnee varnish for damaged china, 141. 
 
 Sole leather for “ stamping,” 77. 
 
 Spatula or smoothing iron for repousse work, 95. 
 
 Split paper, How to, 142. 
 
 Spoon, To carve a, 51. 
 
 Staining, Substitute for, 64. 
 
 Stamped backgrounds, 42. 
 
 “ Stamped leather,” 77 ; tools for, 77 ; tracing design 
 on, 77 ; treatment of background, 78 ; varnishes 
 and oil colours for, 78. 
 
 Stand, The, for clay modelling, 18, 20. 
 
 “Stepping,” 128. 
 
 Strip iron for bent-iron work, 105. 
 
 Surface decoration in wood-carving, 37; articles 
 suitable for, 38. 
 
 Sycamore wood for pyrogravure, 62. 
 
 T. 
 
 Tapestry carpets, Colours for, 131. 
 
 Taxidermy : skinning and preparing, 143 ; tools, 
 143 ; use of arsenic, 145 ; mounting, 146 ; insect 
 taxidermy, 149. 
 
 Textile designing, 129. 
 
 Textures in repousse work, 101. 
 
 Tiles, Designing for, 133. 
 
 Tinted clays, 22. 
 
 Tool chest for wood-carving, 35. 
 
 Tooling in bookbinding, 81. 
 
 Tools, for wax modelling, 27 ; for clay modelling, 17 ; 
 for China clay, 26; for chip carving, 32; for wood¬ 
 carving, 35 ; care of carving, 36 ; for fret-sawing, 
 56 ; for pyrogravure, 61 ; for stamping leather, 
 77 ; for boiled leather, 79 ; bookbinding, 84 ; for 
 repousse work, 93 ; for bent-iron work, 105 ; for 
 taxidermy, 143. 
 
 Tracers for repousse work, 93. 
 
 Tracing or outlining in repousse work, 96. 
 
 Transfer paper for wood-carving, 35. 
 
 Transferring the design for Gesso work, 28 ; for 
 wood-carving, 38 ; use of the mould, 44 ; for 
 stamping leather, 77; in bookbinding 84; for 
 etching, 90 ; for repousse work, 96. 
 
 “Turnabout” match in designing, 126. 
 
 V. 
 
 Varnishing pyrogravure, 63. 
 
 Varnishes for stamped leather work, 78. 
 
 “Viking ” design for wood-carving, 37. 
 
 W. 
 
 Wall-paper, Patterns for, 127 ; dimensions of design,. 
 127 ; the repeat, 128 ; “ stepping,” 128 ; trans¬ 
 ferring the design, 134 ; colours for, 134. 
 
 Walnut wood for carving, 34 ; for fret-sawing, 56. 
 Wax, Modelling in: Modelling wax, 27; “Com¬ 
 posite clay,” 27 ; tools, 27. 
 
 Wax model for China clay modelling, 25. 
 
 Wax for etching, 90. 
 
 Wilton carpet, Colours for, 131. 
 
 Wood-carving— 
 
 Chip or notch carving : 
 
 Simplicity of, 32; tools for, 32 ; wood, 34; the 
 first attempt, 34 ; objects for decoration, 34 • 
 finishing, 34 ; polishing, 34. 
 
 Tools and appliances: 
 
 Transfer paper, 35 ; the bench, 35; tool chest,. 
 35; “holdfast” and “bench screw,” 35; “bench 
 bolts,” 36. 
 
 Preliminary practice: 
 
 Care of tools, 36 ; grinding and setting tools, 36. 
 Surface decoration : 
 
 Designs, 37 ; transferring designs, 38; articles, 
 suitable for, 38. 
 
 Relief carving: 
 
 Transferring the design, 38; “ Kurfing,” 40 
 simple exercises, 40 ; finishing, 40; polishing, 
 41; stamped backgrounds, 42. 
 
 A Gothic dado rail : 
 
 The mould, 43. 
 
 Carving in the round : 
 
 Suitable wood, 51 ; to carve a spoon, 51; fret¬ 
 work in conjunction with, 34; curving bv 
 steaming, 54. 
 
 Wood for carving, 34 ; fretsawing, 56 ; pyrogravure, 
 62. 
 
 Working designs, Preparations of, 134. 
 
 Work-table for repousse work, 95. 
 
 Wrought-iron work : Tools, 105. 
 
 UNWIN BROTHERS, LIMITED, THE GRESHAM PRESS, WOKING AND LONDON. 
 
The Private Life 
 of the King 
 
 As Prince of Wales 
 
 By ONE OF HIS MAJESTY’S 
 SERVANTS. 
 
 With Portraits and numerous Illustrations. 
 
 Extra Crown 8 vo, Bound in Royal Blue , 5 s., post free. 
 
 THE LATEST AND BEST GUIDE¬ 
 BOOKS. 
 
 Pearson’s 
 Gossipy Guides 
 
 With New Maps and the latest information for all 
 travellers, arranged Alphabetically, and with beautiful 
 Illustrations from photographs 
 specially taken for this Series. 
 
 Foolscap 8vo. Price is., and in 
 a few cases 6d. each. Each Guide¬ 
 book contains at least two Maps, 
 and sometimes as many as five, 
 whilst the number of Illustrations 
 varies from 70 to 100. 
 
 The series will consist of Guide¬ 
 books to all seaside and inland 
 resorts of importance in England, 
 
 Scotland, and Ireland, and to 
 some on the Continent. 
 
 Price Is. each , post free , 
 
 Is. 3 d. 
 
 Some of the 18 Chapters are 
 
 CHAPTER 
 
 II.—THE KING’S DOMESTIC LIFE 
 V.—THE HEAD OF SOCIETY 
 VI.—THE LOVE OF HIS LIFE 
 VH.—STUDENT DAYS 
 VIII.—LONDON LIFE 
 
 XII.— WHAT THE KING EATS AND DRINKS 
 
 XIV.— THE KING’S SPORT 
 
 XV._WHAT THE KING WEARS 
 
 XVI.—OUR LORD PROTECTOR 
 XVIII.—IS THE KING A GOOD FELLOW 
 
 “An admirably executed work.”— Athenaum. 
 
 & 
 
 Andrew 
 
 Carnegie 
 
 From Telegraph Boy to 
 Millionaire 
 
 By BERNARD ALDERSON. 
 
 With Four Illustrations. 
 
 Crown 8 vo, Cloth , Price 2 s. 6d., post *ree, 2 s. 9 d. 
 
 BOURNEMOUTH and DISTRICT (including the 
 NEW FOREST). By Clive Holland. 
 SWANAGE and DISTRICT. By Clive Holland. 
 
 Price 6d. 
 
 ILFRACOMBE and DISTRICT. 
 
 NORTH CORNWALL. 
 
 GLASGOW and THE CLYDE. 
 
 SOUTH DEVON. 
 
 THE ENGLISH LAKES. 
 
 GREAT YARMOUTH, LOWESTOFT, and 
 CROMER. 
 
 WEYMOUTH. 
 
 THE THAMES, from Source to Sea. 
 
 LONDON. 
 
 OBAN AND THE WESTERN HIGHLANDS. 
 PARIS. 
 
 EDINBURGH and DISTRICT. 
 
 THE ISLE OF WIGHT. 
 
 CHANNEL ISLANDS, NORMANDY, and 
 BRITTANY. 
 
 WHITBY and DISTRICT. 
 
 SCARBOROUGH and DISTRICT. 
 
 BRIGHTON and DISTRICT. 
 
 WORTHING and DISTRICT. Price 6d. 
 
 To be followed by many others. 
 
 To be had of all Booksellers , or of 
 
 C. ARTHUR PEARSON, LTD., 17, HENRIETTA STREET, LONDON, W.C. 
 
The Best Book on Billiards. 
 
 SECOND LARGE EDITION. 
 
 Modern Billiards 
 
 BY 
 
 JOHN ROBERTS 
 
 AND OTHERS. 
 
 With 921 Diagrams and Illustrations. 
 
 Demy Svo, Cloth, Price 6s., post free. 
 
 ‘ ‘ All lovers of billiards should get a copy of this 
 concise volume, and thereby improve their game at least 
 twenty-five in every hundred they play.” 
 
 Daily Chronicle. 
 
 at at 
 
 Fun on the 
 Billiard Table 
 
 By STANCLIFFE. 
 
 A collection of Amusing Tricks and Gaines for Amateurs, 
 with Photographs and Diagrams. 
 
 Crown Svo, Cloth, Price 2 s. 6d., post free 2 s. 9 d. 
 Some of the 75 tricks shown are :— 
 
 Wet Finger Trick—Wet Cue Trick—Penny in the 
 Pocket—Weight Reducer—To Pocket three balls with 
 one shot To Hit the last ball first—Cannon through a 
 Hat—To Pick up a Penny—Ten Shot—Pass Through— 
 The Imperceptible Jump—To Cannon without Touching 
 a Ball—Fifteen Up with a Plate on the Table—Pick a 
 Ball up with two others—To Pocket a Ball in Three 
 Pockets Same Side in one shot—Match Boxes—Cannon 
 two Corks—To Jump a Coin into a Glass—To Pocket a 
 Wineglass—Deceptive Pot Shot—Cannon into a Hat- 
 Endless Cannons—To Hit a Shilling Resting against a 
 Cushion. 
 
 “ To say that no billiard room ought to be without 
 this joyous and ingenious little volume is nothing; there 
 is no player, amateur or professional, who would not get 
 his moneysworth out of it.”—Sportsman. 
 
 ^ at 
 
 The Modern 
 Conjuror 
 
 And Drawing- Room Entertainer 
 
 By C. LANG NEIL. 
 
 Explains and Illustrates tricks by J. N. Maskelyne, 
 Trewey, Charles Bertram, Nelson Downs, Mdlle. Patrice’ 
 Frank Kennard, Paul Valadon, and others, with about 
 500 Illustrations. 
 
 Demy Svo, Cloth , Price 6s., post free. 
 
 J> at 
 
 NEW AND ENLARGED EDITION. 
 
 The Acrostic 
 Dictionary 
 
 By Mrs. A. CYRIL PEARSON. 
 
 Containing over 40,000 References. 
 
 Crown 8 vo, Cloth, Price 3 s. 6d., post free. 
 
 at at 
 
 Home Pets, 
 
 Furred & Feathered 
 
 A Book of Advice on Pets of all kinds, and how to keep 
 them in Good Condition. 
 
 By MARY FERMOR. 
 
 With Eight Illustrations. 
 
 Crown Svo, Price 2 s. 6d., post free 2 s. 9 d. 
 
 at at 
 
 Practice Strokes 
 at Billiards 
 
 By F. M. HOTINE, 
 
 Late editor of The Billiard Review, with numerous 
 diagrams and illustrations. 
 
 Cloth, Price 1b., post free Is. 2 d. 
 
 Every Woman her 
 Own Doctor 
 
 A Complete Book in plain English concerning the 
 Ailments and Accidents to which Women and Children 
 are liable, and their Cure. 
 
 By an M.D. 
 
 Crown Svo, Price 2 s. 6d., post free 2 s. 9 d. 
 
 To be had of all Booksellers, or of 
 
 C. ARTHUR PEARSON, LTD., 17, HENRIETTA STREET, LONDON, W.C. 
 
The Mistakes 
 We Make 
 
 Compiled by C. E. CLARK. 
 
 Fcap. 8 vo, Cloth, Price Is. 6d., post free Is. 8d. 
 
 Some of the Twelve Chapters are:— 
 
 Chap. I.— THINGS THAT WE CALL BY THEIR 
 WRONG NAMES. 
 
 „ II.— MISTAKES WE MAKE ABOUT 
 PLACES AND THEIR NAMES. 
 
 „ VI.— COMMON ERRORS IN SPEECH AND 
 WRITING. 
 
 „ X.— HISTORICAL MISTAKES. 
 
 How and 
 What to Dance 
 
 By W. LAMB, 
 
 President of British Association of Teachers of Dancing. 
 
 Crown 8 vo, Cloth, Price Is., post free Is. 2 d. 
 
 Containing complete instructions in the art of Dancing, 
 including all the latest and fashionable square dances and 
 skirt dancing. 
 
 & 
 
 Little 
 
 Economies 
 
 And How to Practise Them 
 
 By Mrs. WALDEMAR LEVERTON. 
 
 Crown 8 vo. Cloth, Price Is., post free Is. 2 d. 
 
 An invaluable book, giving outlines of the way and 
 means of studying economy in all branches. 
 
 Boy’s and Girl’s 
 Reciter 
 
 Price Is., post free Is. 2d. 
 
 A collection of the very best Recitations, Stories, etc., 
 by well-known authors. The greatest care has been 
 bestowed in selecting only such pieces as are thoroughly 
 suitable for public and private use. _ 
 
 Dinners of 
 the Day 
 
 By A CAREFUL COOK 
 (Mrs. Praga). 
 
 Crown 8 vo. Cloth, Price 2 s. 6d., or post free, 2 s. 9 d. 
 
 Some of the Chapters are :— 
 
 The stock pot—Thrift in the kitchen—An English 
 v. a French dinner—Economical meals—Fish stocks 
 Bad Management—How to train a cook—The false 
 economist—The store cupboard—The gentle art of 
 shopping—The food and management of servants 
 Parties and party giving—Dainty dinner tables—Food 
 in furnished lodgings—Emergency meals Salads and 
 salad making—Fruit as food—Sunday suppers Seaside 
 cookery—Macaroni, and how to cook it Sauces A 
 dinner without meat—New Dishes—Popular puddings 
 Also a large collection of choice menus and recipes for 
 complete dinners. 
 
 
 Sweetmeat=Making 
 at Home 
 
 By Mrs. M. E. RATTRAY, 
 
 First-class Diplomee, National Training School of 
 Cookery, London. 
 
 With Coloured Frontispiece and several Illustrations. 
 Cloth , Price 2 s. 6d., post free 2 s. 9 d. 
 
 Some of the Chapter Headings are 
 
 Chap. I—SUGAR AND SUGAR-BOILING. 
 
 H-NUTS, FLAVOURINGS AND 
 ” COLOURINGS. 
 
 IV —c O O K E D FONDANT SWEET- 
 ” MEATS. 
 
 V.—MARZIPAN. 
 
 VI—BON-BONS AND AMERICAN 
 ” CANDIES. 
 
 ,, VIII.—MISCELLANEOUS RECIPES. 
 
 CONFECTIONERY UTENSILS FOR SWEET¬ 
 MEAT-MAKING. 
 
 To be had of all Booksellers , or of 
 
 C. ARTHUR PEARSON, LTD., 17, HENRIETTA STREET, LONDON, W.C 
 
 t 
 
Our Food 
 
 and 
 
 Drinks 
 
 By Dr. ANDREW WILSON. 
 
 Price Is., post free , Is. 2 d. 
 
 Dr. Wilson is recognised as the standard authority on 
 what may be termed Domestic Chemistry, and the 
 subject with which he deals in this little volume is one 
 the importance of which cannot be over-estimated. 
 
 The subjects dealt with in this book are:— 
 
 • 
 
 The rudiments of health—About our food—Diet 
 rules and diet adjuncts—Our drinks—About water— 
 Impurities in foods—How our food is digested—Diges¬ 
 tion in the stomach—Digestion in the intestine—How 
 food is absorbed. 
 
 Infectious 
 
 Diseases 
 
 And how to 
 Prevent Them 
 
 By Dr. ANDREW WILSON. 
 
 Price Is., post free. Is. 2d. 
 
 This little work is intended as a guide to the house¬ 
 holder (and especially to mothers) in the all-important 
 matter of the prevention of infectious diseases. 
 
 The subjects dealt with in this book are :— 
 
 Chap. I.—WHAT INFECTIOUS DISEASES 
 ARE. 
 
 ,, II.—WHAT INFECTION MEANS. 
 
 ,, III.—WFIAT FEVERS ARE. 
 
 ,, IV.—DISINFECTION AND DISINFEC¬ 
 TANTS. 
 
 Household 
 
 Hints 
 
 Edited by “ ISOBEL,” of Home Notes. 
 
 Price Is., post free Is. 2 d. 
 
 This volume deals with every kind of advice and 
 recipe for keeping a house in perfect condition. 
 
 The aim in all the recipes is to make them exceedingly 
 simple and practical, and of use to the veriest amateur. 
 
 Some of the numerous recipes are :— 
 
 Advantage of air beds—To make alum water—A safe 
 antidote — To destroy ants — To keep bacon — Cold 
 bandages—Damp beds—To clean brass-—To make 
 blacking—Blankets—Blinds—To preserve boots—Hints 
 about unbleached calico—To lay carpets—Hints on 
 carving—To make cement—To clean leather chairs—- 
 Cure for chilblains—To destroy cockroaches—To make 
 cold cream—Cooking terms—To make court plaster—- 
 To kill crickets—To colour lace curtains—To clean 
 curtains—Hints on washing dishes—To preserve eggs— 
 To clean engravings—To curl ostrich feathers—To 
 polish steel—To clean filters—To smoke fish—To 
 remove inkstains—To clean fur—To keep cut flowers— 
 Hints on food—To clean gilt frames—To wash leather 
 gloves—To clean gloves—To remove grease—To make 
 gum—To make hair wash, hair lotion, etc.—Remedy for 
 chapped hands, etc., etc., with many household remedies. 
 
 & 
 
 Plain 
 
 Needlework 
 
 Edited by “ ISOBEL,’’ of Home Notes. 
 
 Price Is., post free Is. 2 d. 
 
 The object of this book is to show, by examples and 
 simple directions, the best way of executing all the most 
 necessary details of what is usually termed plain work. 
 
 It is a fact that many a one is heavily handicapped in 
 her work because she does not know the ordinary 
 methods of hemming, sewing on braid, etc., all very 
 simple when learnt, but without which she can make 
 no progress, and the time to be spent in class learning, 
 cutting out or fitting, etc., has often to be devoted to 
 teaching her to sew. To those, too, who wish to instruct 
 their children or pupils to sew, this book may prove of 
 use. 
 
 To be had of all Booksellers , or of 
 
 C. ARTHUR PEARSON, LTD., 17, HENRIETTA STREET, LONDON, W.C. 
 
Handwriting as an 
 Index to Character 
 
 By Professor P. R. S. FOLI. 
 
 With numerous Illustrations. 
 
 Crown 8 vo, Price Is., post free Is. 2 d. 
 
 By comparing your writing with specimens given in 
 the book you will be able at a glance to read your own 
 character. 
 
 Some of the subjects given in this valuable handbook 
 are 
 
 Famous Autographs and their Signification. 
 
 Character shown by flourishes. 
 
 Activity and Jealousy in handwriting. 
 
 All about the Graphological System. 
 
 Handwriting affected by illness. 
 
 The writing as an index to temperaments. 
 
 Effect of education on handwriting. 
 
 Handwriting and nationality. 
 
 Professions indicated by handwriting. 
 
 Qualities shown by handwriting. 
 
 Representative examples of handwriting. 
 
 Artists. 6 examples. 
 
 Clerical . 6 examples. 
 
 Law. 6 examples. 
 
 Literature . 6 examples. 
 
 Medical profession. 4 examples. 
 
 Music . 6 examples. 
 
 Philanthropists . 4 examples. 
 
 Poets . 6 examples. 
 
 Political . 9 examples. 
 
 Science . 6 examples. 
 
 The Services . 6 examples. 
 
 HnqHc And How to 
 1 ICdlUd Read Them 
 
 A Popular Guide to Phrenology. 
 
 By STACKPOOL E. O’DELL, 
 
 The Eminent Phrenologist. 
 
 With 20 Illustrations. 
 
 Crown 8 vo, Cloth , Price Is., post free Is. 2 d. 
 
 Some of the Contents of this Useful Handbook are :— 
 The Head —The aspiring head—The benefit of brains 
 —Correct measures—The domestic head — Faults and 
 failures—For a business man—Friendship indicated on 
 the head—How to discern temperaments—How to be 
 happy — The imaginative head — Intellectual heads — 
 Mechanical and business heads—Men women ought and 
 ought not to marry—The inoral head—Of a woman in 
 the Civil Service—Of an eccentric— Of millionaires—Of 
 reliable men—Of unworthy mothers — The perceptive 
 head—Photos tell a tale—The professional head—The 
 reflective head— A born cook— A servant who will do her 
 best—How to choose servants—Head showing activity, 
 matrimonial temperament, refined mind, vitality, etc.— 
 Specimens of girls’ heads—To choose a career for girls 
 — A word to ladies about types, etc. 
 
 f f And How to 
 
 nandS Read Them 
 
 By E. RENE. 
 
 Crown Svo, Cloth, Price is., post free Is. 2d. 
 
 Some of the contents of this book are : — 
 
 The different types and what they indicate—Short and 
 long fingered people—Fingers as the indicators of talents, 
 etc.—Evidence of will-power in the thumb—How to 
 judge of temper by the nails—Indications of health on 
 the nails—The mounts and their characteristics—Hands 
 devoid of lines and covered with lines—Principal lines 
 and their meanings—Signs of marriage—Influence lines— 
 Children—Ambition—Intemperance —How to measure 
 time and calculate age—Rules for reading the hands— 
 Straight and crooked fingers — A nervous child—On 
 training youth and choosing a profession—Hands of a 
 lawyer, clergyman, artist, musician, actor, diplomatist, 
 soldier, sailor, author, and other occupations—Hands of 
 the working classes—Signs of good and _ bad health— 
 Cause of unhappy marriages—How palmistry can help 
 —How to choose domestic servants—The hand of a 
 cook, housemaid, and nurse—On fortune-telling—Pre¬ 
 dictions in regard to love and marriage—The line of 
 fame or fortune—Good and bad points to be found on a 
 man’s hand—Why date of death or probable insanity 
 should not be foretold, etc. 
 
 How Shall I 
 Word It? 
 
 A Complete Letter Writer for Men and 
 Women on all Subjects. 
 
 By ONE OF THE ARISTOCRACY. 
 
 Crown 8 vo. Cloth, Price Is., post free Is. 2 d. 
 
 Among the numerous letters contained in the book are 
 the following :— 
 
 Letters and Replies to application for a situation 
 as butler, clerk, companion,, cook, governess, groom, 
 housekeeper, lady’s maid, secretary, shop assistant, typist, 
 —Asking for characters of a cook, housemaid, nurse— 
 “At Home” invitations—Breaking off engagement— 
 Bride’s thanks for wedding present—Dance and dinner 
 invitations—From a workman to his sweetheart—From 
 gentleman or lady announcing his or her engagement— 
 Gentleman reproaching his fiancee with being a flirt— 
 Invitation to be bridesmaid—Lover to his fiancee offering 
 her her freedom—Mistress to servant—Notice to quit— 
 Letter of condolence—Proposal from widower to widow 
 —Proposal of marriage—Servant to mistress—Thanking 
 fiancee for present—To a doctor—To a neighbour or a 
 friend who is ill—To a tradesman—To an editor—To 
 publishers—When sending tickets to a lady—The best 
 taste in notepaper—Rule of punctuation—Underlining 
 words—Forms of address—Ways of ending letters, etc., 
 etc. 
 
 To be had of all Booksellers, or of 
 
 C. ARTHUR PEARSON, LTD., 17, HENRIETTA STREET, LONDON, W.C. 
 
How to Take and 
 Fake Photographs 
 
 By CLIVE HOLLAND, 
 
 Author of “Practical Hints on Photography ,” “ The 
 Artistic in Photography ,” etc., etc. 
 
 Crown 8vo, Cloth, Price Is., or post free Is. 2d. 
 
 Some of the chapters are :— 
 
 Chap. I.—THE DARK ROOM. 
 
 Its size — Fittings — Stock of Chemicals—Various 
 uses. 
 
 Chap. II.—CAMERAS, PLATES, AND FILMS. 
 The choice of a camera—Shutters—Plates and their 
 varieties—The various merits of plates and films, 
 etc. 
 
 Chap. IV.—EXPOSURE. 
 
 Testing speeds of plates—Tables of exposures— 
 Plate speed table—Exposure hints—Don’ts, etc. 
 
 Chap. V.—DEVELOPMENT OF NEGATIVES. 
 Developers—Normal Development—Development 
 of over-exposed and under-exposed plates—Local 
 development — Intensification and reduction of 
 negatives—Re-touching—Varnishing, etc., etc. 
 
 
 Small Gardens 
 
 And How to Make 
 the Most of Them 
 
 By VIOLET BIDDLE. 
 
 Crown 8 vo, Cloth , Price ± 3 ., post free Is. 2d. 
 
 This handbook teems with hints and wrinkles of the 
 utmost importance to amateur gardeners. 
 
 Some of the 18 chapters are :— 
 
 THE MANAGEMENT OF ROOM PLANTS—Best 
 kinds for “roughing it” — The proper way of 
 watering them, etc. 
 
 WINDOW BOXES — How to make them —Suitable 
 soil—Window Plants for different aspects, etc. 
 
 TABLE DECORATION—Preserving and resuscitating 
 flowers—Table of flowers in season, etc. 
 
 VARIOUS HINTS — Artificial manures — Labelling— 
 Cutting off dead flowers—Buying plants. 
 
 Table Tennis 
 
 And How to Play it 
 
 With Rules and several Illustrations. 
 
 By M. J. G. RITCHIE, 
 
 Ox the All-England Table-Tennis Club, and 
 
 WALTER HARRISON, 
 
 Of the Cavendish Table Tennis Club. 
 
 Cloth, Price Is., or post free Is. 2d. 
 
 This splendid handbook deals with :— 
 
 Ways of holding the racquet—Accessories for the 
 game—Methods of celebrated lawn-tennis players in 
 table-tennis—“Drives”—Forehand and backhand strokes 
 —Half-volleys—Hints for beginners—How to form table- 
 tennis clubs—How to learn the game—How to conduct 
 International matches—Leading strokes—The “Return” 
 —The “Service”—The “ Smash Handicap scoring 
 in match play—Necessary appliances for the game— 
 Necessary qualifications for a good player—Rules for 
 table-tennis—Special rules for match play—Strokes to 
 cultivate—The name versus ping-pong—American system 
 of tournament play—English system of tournament play 
 —Suggestions for a club tournament—Why it is called 
 “Ping-Pong,” etc., etc. 
 
 Poultry Keeping 
 
 And How to make it Pay 
 
 By F. E. WILSON, 
 
 Contributoi to “Poultry,” and the *‘ Farmer and 
 Stockbreeder .” 
 
 Price Is., post free Is. 2d. 
 
 Some of the 19 chapters are :— 
 
 Chap. I.—Making a start—Number of birds to begin 
 with, etc. 
 
 „ II.—Natural and artificial hatching—Setting a 
 
 hen—How to test eggs, etc. 
 
 ,, III.—The rearing and management of chickens. 
 
 ,, IV.—Houses and runs — The kind of house 
 
 wanted, etc. 
 
 „ V.—Foods and Feeding—Feeding in summer, 
 
 winter, etc. 
 
 , r VI.—Poultry for profit — Best egg - producing 
 
 breeds, etc. 
 
 ,, VIII.—Breeding for egg-production. 
 
 IX.—Poultry for exhibition. 
 
 ,, XVII.—Ducks—Duck rearing a profitable industry, 
 etc., etc. 
 
 To be had of all Booksellers, or of 
 
 C. ARTHUR PEARSON, LTD., 17, HENRIETTA STREET, LONDON, W.C. 
 

 
 * ♦ 
 
 
 
 
 PP. :